All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 1

04

955.203.182 TQZZA

RELEASED

/3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

6

6

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALETHIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

RRA 155/N+1/R

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)

– No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 262– DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du –ks): 25.875 kBytes

INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

– STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING

– COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:

faseNo pagine(facciate)

numeratenumbered

step(facciate)No pages da from a to

1 TARGHETTE - LABELS

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA

frontespiziofront

2

2955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAAEd.04 manuale

manual254 1/254 254/254

3ALLEGATI DI UNITÀ (MSZZQ)UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS

Vedere lista da pagina:See list from page:

No documenti MSZZQNo documents MSZZQ3 UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS

(MSZZQ) 252 16

TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 256

TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 128

WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY

• The documents MSZZQ cited in section ’UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST’ are stored in PDAS.• Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 2

04

955.203.182 TQZZA

RELEASED

/3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

6

6

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALETHIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 3

04

955.203.182 TQZZA

RELEASED

/3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

6

6

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALETHIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

WTDSite

Originators

CONCOREZZO

:

Domain

RRA 155/N+1/R

Division

Rubric

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

TypeDistribution Codes Internal External

::::

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

:

G.BERTAGLIOG.MAISTO

Approvals

NameApp.

App.Name

G.BERTAGLIO

M.ORSUCCI

INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI

– ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 4.10• sistemazione ’figlist’

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.043CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

04

RRA 155/N+1/R

Radio Regeneration Adaptation for 9600 LH/UH Systems

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 4

04

955.203.182 TQZZA

RELEASED

/3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

6

6

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALETHIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 5

04

955.203.182 TQZZA

RELEASED

/3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

6

6

RRA 155/N+1/R

Radio Regeneration Adaptation for 9600 LH/UH Systems

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

VOL.1/1

RRA 155/N+1/R

Radio Regeneration Adaptation for 9600 LH/UH Systems

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

VOL.1/1

RRA 155/N+1/R

Radio Regeneration Adaptation for 9600 LH/UH Systems

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1

RRA 155/N+1/RRadio Regeneration Adaptation for 9600 LH/UH Systems

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1

RRA 155/N+1/R

Radio Regeneration Adaptation for 9600 LH/UH Systems

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 6

04

955.203.182 TQZZA

RELEASED

/3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

6

6

FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO – END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

Technical Handbook

AlcatelRRA 155/N+1/R

Radio Regeneration Adaptation for 9600 LH/UH Systems

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

1

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HANDBOOK GUIDE 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FOREWORD 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 WARRANTY 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.1 Safety 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 General rules 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Labels on the equipment indicating danger 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 Earth symbols 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 Danger symbols used in documentation 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.5 First aid for electric shock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6.1 General information 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Handbook applicability 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.3 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.4 Handbook supply to Customers 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.5 Aims of standard Customer Documentation 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.6 Product-release handbooks 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.7 Handbook Structure 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.8 Handbook Updating 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.9 Handbook configuration check 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.7 SUGGESTIONS, NOTES AND CAUTIONS 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 LABELS AFFIXED TO THE EQUIPMENT 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 ABBREVIATIONS 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESCRIPTION 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PRODUCT 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 INTRODUCTION 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 LAYOUT 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR

01 980203 V.CASIRAGHI ITACO M.BANDIERA ITACO

03 990608 S499060802 G.BERTAGLIO ITACO G.BERTAGLIO ITACO

00102604 S400102601 M.ORSUCCI ITACO G.MAISTO ITACO

RRA 155/N+1/R TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

2

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Electrical / optical characteristics 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Mechanicals characteristics 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 Environmental characteristics 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 1+1 configuration 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 3+1 configuration 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 Up to 7+1 configuration 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5 UNITS DESCRIPTION 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC RRA O/E INT S1.1 SC RRA O/E INT S.1.1 DIN 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 O/E substitutive unit 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.3 RRA standard 155 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.4 Hitless switch 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.5 SPL (Switching and Power Logic) 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.6 Electrical Switch (1+1) 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.7 3+1/4+1 Tx protection switch 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.8 3+1/4+1 Rx protection switch 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.9 RRAUX party–line 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.10 Forcing driver 155 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.11 Equipment Controller SMEC 2A 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.12 Power supply unit 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.13 I/O extension 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.14 Service unit 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.15 EOW repeater/double terminal unit (DTMF) 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.16 TPH DESK repeater/D.T. unit (DTMF) 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.17 VF for DTMF DT 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.18 Terminal station 8x1200baud data service 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.19 Terminal station multirate data service (Nx2400) 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.20 AND OR/S 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.21 IECB – termination 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.22 Clock external receiver 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 UNPACKING AND STORAGE 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.1 General 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Unpacking 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 Storage 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.1 Subrack electrical connections 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 1+1 configuration installation 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 3+1 configuration installation 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4 Up to 7+1 configuration installation 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 COMMISSIONING 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Preliminary operation 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Power–up 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Check and measurement procedure 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAINTENANCE 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 GLOBAL OPERATIONS 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

3

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

5 MAINTENANCE 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 DEFINITIONS 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1.1 Preventive maintenance 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Corrective maintenance 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Engineer’s technical qualifications 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Periodicity 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 SPARE PARTS 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDICES 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

4

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURESFig. 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 3. Labels for units with heat–sink 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 5. Labels for units with no spaces on the front cover 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 6. Subrack labels 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 7. Modules’ labels 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 8. Label identifying label on catalogue 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9. Label specifying serial No. 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 10. RSA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the 1+1 configuration 50. . . . . . . . . Fig. 11. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for 1+1 configuration 51. . . Fig. 12. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for 1+1 configuration 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 13. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the 3+1 configuration 55. . . . . . . . Fig. 14. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for 3+1 configuration 56. . . Fig. 15. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for 3+1 configuration 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 16. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the up to 7+1 configuration 60. . . Fig. 17. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for up to 7+1 configuration 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 18. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for up to 7+1 configuration 62. . . . . . . . . Fig. 19. Operating Climatic Chart 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 20. Storage Climatic Chart 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 21. 1+1 version block diagram: RRA and switch with single electrical interface 85. . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 22. 1+1 version block diagram: RRA and switch with dual optical interface 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 23. 1+1 version block diagram: Services and management 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 24. 1+1 version block diagram: Power Supply 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 25. 1+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 26. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Tx side (optical unit) 96. . . . Fig. 27. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Rx side (optical unit) 97. . . . Fig. 28. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Tx side 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 29. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Rx side 99. . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 30. 3+1 version block diagram: Services management 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 31. 3+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 32. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Tx side (optical unit) 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 33. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Rx side (optical unit) 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 34. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: RRA 4+1 with spare, Tx side 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 35. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: RRA 4+1 with spare, Rx side 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 36. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Service management 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 37. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 38. SOH structure 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 39. RRA O/E interface: operative points 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 40. RRA O/E interface: block diagram 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 41. O/E substitutive unit: operative points 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 42. O/E substitutive unit: block diagram 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 43. RRA standard 155: operative points 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 44. RRA standard 155: block diagram 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 45. Hitless switch: operative points 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 46. Hitless switch: block diagram 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 47. SPL: operative points 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 48. SPL: block diagram 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 49. 1+1 Electrical switch: operative points 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

5

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Fig. 50. Electrical switch: block diagram 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 51. Tx electrical switch (3+1, 4+1): operative points 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 52. Tx Protection Switch (3+1, 4+1): block diagram 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 53. Rx electrical switch (3+1, 4+1): operative points 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 54. Rx Protection Switch (3+1, 4+1): block diagram 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 55. RRAUX party line: operative points 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 56. RRAUX party–line: block diagram 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 57. Forcing driver 155: operative points 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 58. Forcing driver 155: block diagram 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 59. Equipment Controller (EC): operative points 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 60. Equipment Controller: block diagram 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 61. Power supply unit (PS): operative points 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 62. Power supply unit: block diagram 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 63. I/O extension: operative points 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 64. Service unit: operative points 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 65. Service unit: block diagram of the AND OR circuit 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 66. Service unit: block diagram of the Q3 interface, IECB termination and Clock External driver 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 67. Terminal/repeater DTMF EOW service: operative points 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 68. EOW repeater unit DTMF: block diagram 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 69. TPH DESK REP/DT (DTMF): operative points 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 70. TPH DESK repeater/D.T. unit DTMF: block diagram 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 71. VF for DTMF DT: operative points 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 72. VF for DTMF DT: block diagram 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 73. Terminal 8x1200baud data service (USK): operative points 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 74. Terminal 8x1200baud data service: block diagram 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 75. Terminal multirate data service (USK): operative points 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 76. Terminal multirate data service (Tx/Rx): block diagram 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 77. Terminal multirate data service (timing and 1+1 logic): block diagram 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 78. AND/OR: operative points 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 79. AND OR/S adapter: block diagram 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 80. IECB termination: operative points 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 81. Clock ext. receiver: operative points 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 82. Assembly with electrical interface (1+1 version): internal connection cable kit 222. . . . . . . . . . Fig. 83. Assembly with electrical interface (3+1 version): internal connection cable kit 231. . . . . . . . . . Fig. 84. Assembly with electrical interface (3+1 version): internal connection cable kit 236. . . . . . . . . .

TABLESTab. 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 3. Handbooks associated with the product’s local management/control software 22. . . . . . . . . . Tab. 4. Handbook configuration check 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 5. Label references 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 6. List of Abbreviations 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 7. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: 1+1 configuration layout 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 8. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: 3+1 configuration layout 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 9. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: up to 7+1 configuration layout 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 10. STM–1 optical interface characteristics 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 11. RRA standard 155 presettable Unit/Sub–unit 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 12. 1+1/R hitless switch presettable Unit/Sub–unit 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 13. SPL/R presettable Unit/Sub–unit 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 14. RRAUX party line presettable Unit/Sub–unit 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 15. Forcing Driver presettable Unit/Sub–unit 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 16. Equipment Controller SMEC 2A presettable Unit/Sub–unit 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

6

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 17. Service unit presettable Unit/Sub–unit 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 18. EOW repeater/double terminal unit (DTMF) presettable Unit/Sub–unit 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 19. TPH DESK rep/D.T. unit (DTMF) presettable Unit/Sub–unit 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 20. VF for DTMF DT presettable Unit/Sub–unit 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 21. 8x1200 data service terminal, presettable Unit/Sub–unit 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 22. (Nx2400) multirate data service terminal, presettable Unit/Sub–unit 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 23. AND OR/S presettable Unit/Sub–unit 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 24. Services installation (1+1 version) 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 25. Additional housekeeping (1+1 version) 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 26. B2 byte monitor (1+1 version) 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 27. Party line paths of USK unit and data channels for data USK units (Nx1200 or Nx2400 multi-rate) (1+1 version) 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 28. Tx power and Rx power recording (1+1 version) 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 29. Equipment remote alarms (1+1 version) 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 30. Housekeeping provided by the Equipment Controller (1+1 version) 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 31. Primary power supply (1+1 version) 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 32. Alarms/Remote alarms installation for parallel supervision (1+1 version) 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 33. Additional housekeeping provided by I/O Extension (1+1 version) 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 34. Services installation (AUX unit 1) (3+1 version) 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 35. Services installation (AUX unit 2) (3+1 version) 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 36. B2 byte monitor (3+1 version) 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 37. Alarms and remote alarms for parallel supervision provided by Driver Forcing (3+1 ver-sion) 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 38. Equipment remote alarms (3+1 version) 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 39. Housekeeping provided by the Equipment Controller (3+1 version) 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 40. Primary power supply (3+1 version) 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 41. Additional housekeeping provided by I/O Extension (3+1 version) 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 42. Service installation (AUX unit 1) (7+1 version) 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 43. Service installation (AUX unit 2) (7+1 version) 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 44. B2 byte monitor (7+1 version) 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 45. Additional housekeeping or alarm provided by the Driver Forcing (7+1 version) 235. . . . . . . . Tab. 46. Primary power supply (7+1 version) 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 47. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’ 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 48. Hardware presetting documentation 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

7

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

HANDBOOK GUIDE

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

8

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

9

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1 FOREWORD

1.1 WARRANTY

See the terms of the contract of sale.

1.2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS

The CE marking: printed on the product denotes compliance with the following directives:

1.2.1 Safety

– 73/23/EEC amended by the 93/68/EEC directiveCompliance with the directives is acknowledged when the equipment conforms to the requirementsspecified by the following standards:• IEC 950 (1991) + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4,• IEC 215 (1987) + A1 ,• EN 41003 (1993).

Equipment category: Fixed link (Class 1).

1.2.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

– 89/336/EEC of May 3rd 1989, amended:• by the 92/31/EEC norm issued on April 28th 1992• by the 93/68/EEC norm issued on July 22nd 1993.

The product is compliant with the electromagnetic compatibility specifications of ETS 300385 norm. Theenvironment considered in the ETS 300385 norm are defined as environments for telecommunicationcentres in accordance with the definition reported in the ETS 300386–1 norms.For the grounding distribution the ETS 300254 norm is applied.

Equipment category: Fixed link.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

10

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.3 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1.3.1 General rules

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation,service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specificwarnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intendeduse of the product. ALCATEL assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with theserequirements.

Ground the equipment: For Safety Class 1 equipment (equipment having a protective earth terminal),an uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product inputwiring terminals or power cable.

DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in presence of flammable gases orfumes.

For continued protection against short circuits: replace the line fuse(s) only with fuse(s) of the samevoltage and current rating and type. DO NOT use repaired fuses or short–circuited fuse holders.

Keep away from live circuits: Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields.Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields are for use by service–trained personnel only. Undercertain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with equipment switched off. To avoid dangerouselectrical shock, DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless you are qualifiedto do so.

DO NOT operate an equipment which may be damaged: Whenever it is possible that the safetyprotection features built into this product have been impaired. REMOVE POWER and do not use theproduct until safe operation can be verified by service–trained personnel. If necessary, return the productto Alcatel Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.

DO NOT service or adjust alone: Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person,capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.

DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment: Because of the danger of introducting additionalhazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product. Returnthe product to Alcatel Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any inflammablesubstances or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions etc– The Safety Rules are distinguished in the handbook by a symbol and statement, see para.1.3.4

page 14.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

11

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.3.2 Labels on the equipment indicating danger

When subassemblies and modules are fitted with warning labels, it is essential that you reed the warnings.These labels are produced to international standard IEC 417. The symbols or labels are in geometricshapes:

CONTAINS A SYMBOL OR TEXT INDICATING:–A PROHIBITION(WHITE BACKGROUND AND RED BORDER WITHBLACK SYMBOL OR TEXT)– AN OBLIGATION(BLUE BACKGROUND WITH SYMBOL OR TEXT).

CONTAINS A SYMBOL REPRESENTS: – A WARNING OR A DANGER (YELLOW BACKGROUND WITH BLACK SYMBOL AND BORDER).

CONTAINS TEXT GIVING:INFORMATION OR AN INSTRUCTION THAT MAY BEASSOCIATED WITH A WARNING SYMBOL(BLACK TEXT AND BORDER ON YELLOW BACKGROUND).

These labels are designed to indicate dangerous situations; they may contain any standard symbol or anylabel considered necessary to protect users and employees and equipment.

The most frequent danger situations and symbols are:

Danger or general warning

Dangerous electrical voltagesClose to dangerous voltages (>42.4 V peak, 60 V DC; power level 2 240 VA) you will find the followingwarning label:

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

12

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Danger, high temperaturesThe presence of heat–radiating mechanicals parts is indicated by the following label in compliancy withIEC 417 NORM, fig. 5041

Risk of explosionBatteries/risk of explosion, the following label is affixed with the following warning:

CAUTIONThere is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with a battery of the same typeor an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

Dispose of the old batteries in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions.

Sensitivity to electrostatic discharges

Harmful optical signalsIf the assembly or unit is fitted with a laser, the labels most comply with the IEC 825–1–1993 InternationalNorms:

The symbol indicates the presence of a laser beam. Danger level is stated within rectangular label:

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

13

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

If the laser is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.The rectangular shapes label describes all the information needed, i.e.:– Laser class,– Power emitted,– Wave length,– Ref. norm.,– Precautionary measures taken depend on Laser class,– Indications given on openings panels and safety interlocks

CAUTIONLASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEWDIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

LASER RADIATIONDO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW

DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTSCLASS 3A LASER PRODUCTP.MAX=31mV..... = 1300mm IEC 825 1993

Moving mechanical partsThe following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:

Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have beenstopped.

1.3.3 Earth symbols

Terminal for connecting the protective earth conductorin power supply wiring

Other earth terminal

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

14

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.3.4 Danger symbols used in documentation

These symbols alert the reader to possible risks. They indicate:– the cause and type of danger,– the possible consequences,– the preventive action.

– protection of personnel

– warning of a possible dangerous situation

– danger of a serious injury

– protection of equipment

warning

attention

– warning to a procedure, practice, or condition that could be dangerous for equipment or its environment

– danger for equipment or environment damage; permanent loss data possibility.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

15

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.3.5 First aid for electric shock

Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.

Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry materi-al and free the patient from the conductor.

ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION

It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.

TREATMENT OF BURNS

This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed whilethe artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).

WARNING:

• Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;

• Apply dry gauze on the burns;

• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

16

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Mouth to mouth resuscitation method

1

2

3

4

5

6

Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is layingon an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.Open the patient’s mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in hismouth (dentures, chewing–gum etc.),

Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Puta hand under the patient’s head and one underhis neck (see fig.) Lift the patient’s head and letit recline backwards as far as possible

Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to is chin:place your thumb between his chin and hismouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep theother fingers closed together (see fig.). Whileperforming these operations take a good supplyof oxygen by taking deep breaths with yourmouth open.

With your thumb between the patient’s chin andmouth keep his lips together and blow into hisnasal cavities (see fig.)

While performing these operations observe if thepatient’s chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possiblethat his nose is blocked: in that case open thepatient’s mouth as much as possible by pressingon his chin with your hand, place your lips aroundhis mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observeif the patient’s chest heaves. This secondmethod can be used instead of the first evenwhen the patient’s nose is kept closed bypressing the nostrils together using the hand youwere holding his head with. The patient’s headmust be kept sloping backwards as much aspossible.

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteenexpirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regainedconsciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

17

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)

The EMC performance of the equipment depends largely on installation (cables, earth connections, etc)and operation (equipment, configuration, shielding etc).

General specifications – Installation

– For all links consisting of shielded cables, use only cables and connectors of the types indicated orhaving a lower transfer impedance (Zt).

– If a maximum cable length is specified, do not exceed that length.

– Adhere strictly to the procedures specified for assembling the shielded cables.

– Connect the cable shielding to earth as instructed.

– Install any filters external to the equipment in the positions and using the method specified.

– Earth the equipment using a cable of the specified cross section and impedance.

– Fit any shielding that has to be installed during installation; clean and remove the grease from all partsbefore assembly.

– Before inserting shielded modules, clean and remove the grease from all contact surfaces (contactsprings, abutting surfaces etc).

– Follow the additional instructions for correct installation of the equipment for EMC.

General specifications – Commissioning and startup

– Perform the operations necessary for the electrical modules to ensure EMC performance.

– Check operation of the equipment when all shielding is correctly in place (front shielding, electrostaticdischarge protection for connectors, etc).

– Follow any additional instructions concerning the proper use of the equipment for EMC.

General specifications – Maintenance

– Before inserting shielded replacement modules in place of failed modules or when changing theequipment configuration, clean and remove the grease from the contact surfaces (contact springs,abutting surfaces, etc).

– In the event of replacement, also clean the shielding.

The EMC rules are distinguished in the handbook by a symbol and statement, see para.1.3.2 page 11.

The EMC rules are specified in the following chapters:

• 3.3

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

18

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.5 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

Before removing the ESD protection on the monitors, connectors etc, follow the advice below.Always replace the ESD protection when the routine maintenance or other procedure is finished.

Many electrical devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharge; these have the following warning labels:

ELECTROSTATICSENSITIVEDEVICES

ATTENTION

If you need to work on these electronic devices during installation/maintenance, be particularly vigilant.You must be earthed by the elastic wrist strap and associated spiral cable:

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÍÍÍÍ

ÍÍ

ÈÈÈÈ

ELASTIC STRAP

SPIRAL CABLE

– The elastic strap must be attached to your wrist.

– The spiral cable must be attached to the elastic strap and to the earth terminal on the equipmentframe.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

19

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.6 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.6.1 General information

WARNING

ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims theimplied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liablefor errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or spe-cial, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

NOTICE

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for informationpurposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on thepart of ALCATEL.

COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION

The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, repro-duced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

20

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.6.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product versions:

PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

9639LH 3CY 06637 AAAA 522.341.200

9640LH 3CY 06986 AAAA 522.341.700

9647LH 3CY 06987 AAAA 522.342.200

9662LH 3CY 06988 AAAA 522.350.400

9667LH 3CY 06989 AAAA 522.350.800

9674LH 3CY 06990 AAAA 522.356.200

9681LH 3CY 06991 AAAA 522.361.200

9611LH 3CY 06653 AAAA 522.365.300

9613UH 3CY 06412 AAAA 522.371.200

9615UH 3CY 06992 AAAA 522.372.100

9618UH 3CY 06188 AAAA 522.375.100

9623UH 3CY 06993 AAAA 522.376.100

9625UH 3CY 06994 AAAA 522.377.100

PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

9639LH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05704 AAAA 522.341.100

9640LH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05705 AAAA 522.341.600

9647LH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05706 AAAA 522.342.100

9662LH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05707 AAAA 522.350.300

9667LH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05708 AAAA 522.350.700

9674LH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05709 AAAA 522.356.100

9681LH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05710 AAAA 522.361.100

9611LH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05711 AAAA 522.365.200

9613UH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05712 AAAA 522.371.100

9615UH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 05910 AAAA 522.372.000

9618UH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 02077 AAAA 522.375.000

9623UH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 03967 AAAA 522.376.000

9625UH 1.00.00 –– 3CY 04882 AAAA 522.377.000

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

21

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.6.3 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation

A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of per-formance and services for which it is meant.A ”product” evolves through successive ”product-releases” which are the real products marketed fortheir delivery at a certain ”product-release” availability date.

So, a ”product–release” defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific ”product-re-lease” has been designed, engineered and marketed for.

In some cases a ”product-release” has further development steps, named ”versions”, that are born toimprove or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixingpurposes.

A ”product-release” has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more hand-books.

A new ”version” of a ”product-release” may or may not produce a change in the status of the CustomerDocumentation set, as described in para.1.6.8 on page 24.

1.6.4 Handbook supply to Customers

Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.

1.6.5 Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as faras contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is notdescribed here).

Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibilityand the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment ac-cording to Alcatel–Telecom Laboratory design choices.In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on theexplanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance isdescribed down to faulty PCB location and replacement.

Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and pro-duction documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.

Usually the handbooks dedicated to the view of several assemblies (in general, the ”System Handbook”,the hardware handbooks (in general the ”Technical Handbook”) and the software handbook(s) (in generalthe ”Operator Handbook”) are separated, in that not necessarily product changes affect the contents ofthe three types of handbooks.

For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configurationchanges (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function).On the other hand, the Operator’s Handbook is updated because of a new software version but whichdoes not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.However, three types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

22

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.6.6 Product-release handbooks

The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-re-lease-version is stated on the manual’s front page consists of the following handbooks (see para. 1.6.2page 20):

Tab. 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware

HANDBOOK ANV P/n Factory P/NTHIS

HANDBOOK

9600LH N+1/R System Handbook 3CY 07972 AAAA 954.200.682

9600UH N+1/R System Handbook 3CY 08062 AAAA 954.200.692

Tab. 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control

HANDBOOK ANV P/N Factory P/NTHIS

HANDBOOK

RRA 155/N+1/R Technical Handbook 3CY 06669 AAAA 955.203.182

Other Technical Handbooks depend on the System configuration. The possible Technical Handbooksare indicated in the System Handbook (see Tab. 1. )

Tab. 3. Handbooks associated with the product’s local management/control software

For the 9600LH N+1/R and 9600UH N+1/R System, the Operator Handbook depends on the Systemconfiguration.The possible Operator Handbooks are indicated in both in the System Handbooks (see Tab. 1. )

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

23

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.6.7 Handbook Structure

This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the ”Code of Practice” for InstructionHandbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RECC. R29/82).

This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:

HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and typeof labels that might be affixed to the equipment.

DESCRIPTION: Provides the general and detailed descriptions, including itsmanual construction and equipment and the technicalcharacteristics (mechanical, electrical and/or opticalcharacteristics) (*).

INSTALLATION AND TURN–ON: Comprises the information necessary for the mechanical,electrical, and/or optical installation and that allowing to turn–onthe equipment (including the measurements to be carried–out tocheck its correct operation) (**).

MAINTENANCE: Comprises the information that allows to check the operatingstatus of the equipment, to perform the troubleshootingactivities, and to repair and restore the normal operation, bylocating the plug–in units that are faulty and replacing them withthe spare ones (**).

APPENDICES: A section included (but not necessarily utilized) to describepossible alternative unit.

HARDWARE SETTINGDOCUMENTATION:

Comprises, in the form of attachments, the documents thatdescribe the hardware settings to be made on the unit and,wherever necessary, other detailed documents (e.g. installationcable kits, etc.).

(*) The general and detailed system descriptions and the insertion of the equipment in the sys-tem are part of the System Handbook (see para. 1.6.6 page 22).

(**) The turn–on and maintenance operations are described in more details in the System Hand-book and in the Operator Handbook (see para.1.6.6 page 22). More specifically, the Techni-cal Handbook provides detailed information on the hardware.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

24

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.6.8 Handbook Updating

The handbooks associated to the ”product–release” are listed in para.1.6.6 on page 22.

Each handbook is identified by:– the name of the ”product-release” (and ”version” when the handbook is applicable to the versions

starting from it, but not to the previous ones),– the handbook name,– the handbook P/N,– the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),– the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date

on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.

1.6.8.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)

The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:

– only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the edi-torial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.

– the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. Inthis case:

• the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Tab. 4. on page 25;• in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and draw-

ings.

Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. fromEd.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition ofa version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A).

NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS

Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are not mod-ified unless the new software ”version” distributed to Customers implies man–machine interfacechanges or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained pro-cedures.

Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s ”ver-sion” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if thescreen contents are unchanged.

1.6.8.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers

Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted tocommercial criteria.By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue(supplying errata–corrige sheets is not envisaged).

1.6.8.2 Changes due to a new product-release

A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01.In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

25

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.6.9 Handbook configuration check

1.6.9.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.

Legend

n = new partm = modified part

Tab. 4. Handbook configuration check

EDITION 03 04 05 06 07 08

GENERAL INFORMATION

2. General product description n m

INSTALLATION AND TURN–ON

3. Installation and turn–on n m

MAINTENANCE

4. General operations n m

5. Maintenance n m

APPENDICES

Not applicable

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION

6. Hardware setting documentation n m

Note: the edition of the enclosed documents (sections HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION)is not subjected to configuration check.

1.6.9.2 Notes on Ed.03

Ed.03, completed on 09 June 1999, is the first version of the handbook in which the configuration controlis made.Specifically, chapter 6 has been completely revised, with a special reference to the detailed documentsattached to the handbook.

1.6.9.3 Notes on Ed.04

Ed.04, completed on 22 October 2000, is the second version of the handbook in which the configurationcontrol is made.The main changes have been made to align the manual to the last equipment update and to correct someerrors.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

26

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.7 SUGGESTIONS, NOTES AND CAUTIONS

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:

Suggestion or note....

Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:

TITLE...

(caution to avoid equipment damage)statement....

1.8 LABELS AFFIXED TO THE EQUIPMENT

This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and seriallabels affixed to the equipment.

Fig. 1. thru’ Fig. 7. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and subracks.

Fig. 8. and Fig. 9. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels.

The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.

Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.

Tab. 5. Label references

Ref. No. Name of Label

1 Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.)

2 Serial number of item specified on catalogue

3 Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N.)

4 Final Test certificate

5 Unit ESD mark

6 CE mark

7 ESD mark for packaged subunits

8 Subrack ESD mark

9 Factory use only code

On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

27

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 5. on page 26

Fig. 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

28

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 5. on page 26

Fig. 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

29

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

NB. = Affix labels to p.c.’s components side on the empty spaces.

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 5. on page 26

Fig. 3. Labels for units with heat–sink

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

30

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 5. on page 26

Fig. 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

31

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

4

1

2

NB = Affix labels to p.c.b.’s components side on the empty spaces.

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 5. on page 26. The components shown onthe front–cover are merely indicative showing that there is no space left for the labels

Fig. 5. Labels for units with no spaces on the front cover

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

32

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

6

8

1

2

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 5. on page 26.

Fig. 6. Subrack labels

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

33

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 5. on page 26.

Fig. 7. Modules’ labels

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

34

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ANV + ICS P/N

FACTORY P/N + CS

Bar code of the ANV + ICS P/Ns(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2

Fig. 8. Label identifying label on catalogue

Serial No.

Bar code of the serial No.(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2

Fig. 9. Label specifying serial No.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

35

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1.9 ABBREVIATIONS

Tab. 6. List of Abbreviations

ABBREVIATIONS FUNCTION

A–BOOS Post–amplifier alarm

A–MOD Modulator alarm

A–SYNC 2 Mbit/s synchronizer alarm

A/D Analog/Digital

A1–A2 Frame alignment SOH bytes

ABM Asynchronous Balanced Mode

AC Alternating Current

AGGR Aggregate

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

ALCK2M 2MHz local oscillator failure

AL SOH SOH alarm

ALIM Power supply

ALIM KO Power failure

ALL 2 Mbit/s 2Mbit/s clock failure

ALL 5.1 MB 5.184 MHz clock failure

ALL DEM 1/2 Demodulator alarm

ALL EXT E Input signal failure summary alarm

ALL INT E Unit failure summary alarm

ALL/ALM Alarm

ALLTx Transmit alarm

ALM–CK Radio Card Controller unit interface clock

ALM–DI Radio Card Controller unit communication input data

ALM–DO Radio Card Controller unit communication output data

ALM–ENI Radio Card Controller unit communication enabled

ALM–RW Radio Card Controller communication data read/written

ALM–SEL Radio Card Controller unit communication selection

ALM–STB Radio Card Controller unit communication data read/writtenstrobe enabled

ALM Power supply unit alarm

ALMOD Modulator alarm

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

ALTOP Loudspeaker

ALWSR 2x2 Mbit/s wayside traffic alarm, demodulator

ALWSRx 0 Failure criteria–path 0

ALWSRx 1 Failure criteria–path 1

ALWST 2x2 Mbit/s wayside traffic alarm, modulator

AMI Alternate Marking Inversion

ANDALIM Simultaneous power supply failure alarm

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

36

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ABBREVIATIONS FUNCTION

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ATL 1/2 Remote terminal alarm

ATL DIS 1 ATL insertion disabled

ATPC Automatic Transmitted Power Control

BATT Battery

BB Baseband

BER Bit Error Rate

BIP Bit Interleaving Parity

BLOCK 1 Blocking command 1

BLOCK 2 Blocking command 2

BLTC Blocking remote commands block

BRG Baud Rate Generator

B3ZS Binary 3 Consecutive Zeros Substitution

CAN Channel

C.C. Card Controller

CCITT Comité Consultatif International del Télégraphes et Télé-phones

CEPT Comité Européen des Postes et Télécommunications

CH FAIL Integrated circuit failure

CK 1200 1200 baud Clock

CK 38 38,88 MHz Clock

CK 38,88 38,88 MHz Clock

CK 5.1 5,1 MHz Clock

CK Clock signal

CK SOH SOH unit clock

CK–SY–SWC Synchronization and criteria clock from CRU

CKR Receive clock

CKT Transmit clock

COMPA Comparison signal

CPU Control Processing Unit

D Digital

DB Data Bus

DBR Data Bus Receive

DBT Data Bus Transmit

DC Direct Current

dc direct current

DCD Data Carrier Detection

DEG Degraded

DELTA PHASE Switching alignment signal

DEM Demodulator

DEMUX Demultiplexer

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

37

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ABBREVIATIONS FUNCTION

DI Drop/Insert

DIS A Section A disabled

DIS B Section B disabled

DIS Rx Rx disabled

DIS Tx Tx disabled

DLY Static delay setting

DLY A Static delay 1 insertion command

DLY I Static delay 2 insertion command

D1–D12 Service SOH byte

DSI Digital Switching Information

DX Right

DT Transmit Data

DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency

DTR Data Terminal Ready

E/M Ear/Mouth

E Est

EC Equipment Controller

ECC Embedded Communication Channel

ECT Equipment Craft Terminal

EEPROM Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory

EN Enable

EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility

ENDEFA Default Rx standby selection signal

EPS Equipment Protection Switching

ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute

EUMP Microprocessor unit extraction

EW Early–Warning

EW H Early Warning High

EW L Early Warning Low

EXT External

E1, E2 Service SOH bytes

FAT Loss of frame alignment

FAT 1/2 Loss of frame alignment demodulator

FEBE Far End Block Error

FERF Far End Receiver Failure

Forz HSW HSW switching forcing (software)

Forz RSA RSA switching forcing (software)

GA Gate array

GAKO Gate Array KO

GEN Ge

GP General Purpose

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

38

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ABBREVIATIONS FUNCTION

HBER High Bit Error Rate

HBER 0 HBER criteria–path 0

HBER 1 HBER criteria–path 1

HCMOS High speed Complementary MOS

HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3

HDLC High level Data Link Control

HW Hardware

I/IN Input

ID Unit identification

IECB L & N Intra Equipment Control Bus. Local & Network

INC CMOS level input

INEM E/M signal input

ING Input

INIBAL TX A0 Tx alarm inhibition–section A/path 0

INIBAL Tx B0 Tx alarm inhibition–section B/path 0

INIBAL Tx A1 Tx alarm inhibition–section A/path 1

INIBAL Tx B1 Tx alarm inhibition–section B/path 1

INT Internal

IP Primary information

ISP Parallel supervisory interface

K 2 Mbit/s switching command

K2–MAIS A AIS insertion command to 2 Mbit/s user ”A”

K2–MAIS B AIS insertion command to 2 Mbit/s user ”B”

KAIS A AIS command–section A

KAIS B AIS command–section B

KR Hitless switching command

KRN Hitless switching command negated

KRSA RSA switching command

KRSAN RSA switching command negated

K–2 Mbit/s WST 2x2 Mbit/s switching command

K–ATPC ATPC command

K–RSA RSA switching command

K–R11 Hitless switching command

K–SYNC 2 Mbit/s synchronizer switching command

K–SYNCAIS AIS insertion command to 2 Mbit/s user

K–XPIC XPIC inhibition command

Kb/s Kilobits per second

KERA Rx switching command

KETA Tx parallel command

KOMAIS AIS insertion command in 2 Mbit/s stream

KOMAISn AIS replacement command in channel n

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

39

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ABBREVIATIONS FUNCTION

KOMAR Alignment command receive side

KORIF Rephasing command receive

KOTIF Rephasing command transmit

KR–1+1 Hitless switching command

KR–SYNC 2 Mbit/s switching position confirmation

KR–OUT Rx 2x2 Mbit/s duplicated switching position confirmation

KR–OUT Tx Hitless switching position confirmation

KT COD Transmit switching command

K1 K2 SOH bytes

LED Light Emitting Diode

local HSW Manual operation command HSW

local RSA Manual operation command RSA

LOC E Clock failure

LOF Loss Of Frame

LOG INT EXT Internal/external logic

LOS Loss Of Signal

LOS E Loss Of Signal

LSB Least Significant Bit

Mb/s Megabits per second

MEM Storage

MIR Loss of received pulses

MIR 0 Loss of received pulses channel 0

MIR 0 A Loss of received pulses channel 0–section A

MIR 0 B Loss of received pulses channel 0–section B

MIR 1 Loss of received pulses channel 1

MIR 1 A Loss of received pulses channel 1–section A

MIR 1 B Loss of received pulses channel 1–section B

MIR–HRx 1/ 2 MIR channel 0/1 Rx section HSW

MIR–HTx 1/ 2 MIR channel 0/1 Tx section HSW

MIR–SWEL 1/2 MIR electrical switch unit Rx section

MIR DEM E Loss of codirectional interface from DEM

MIR MOD E Loss of contradirectional interface from MOD

MIR SOH E Loss of codirectional interface from SOH unit

MIR Tx A Loss of received pulses Tx input–section A

MIR Tx B Loss of received pulses Tx input–section B

MIT Loss of transmitted pulses

MIT Rx Loss of transmitted pulses Rx

MIT Tx1 Loss of transmitted pulses Tx1

MIT Tx2 Loss of transmitted pulses Tx2

MOD Modulator

MSB Most Significant Bit

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

40

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ABBREVIATIONS FUNCTION

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTR Master Timing Reference

MTTR Mean Time To Repair

MUX Multiplexer

NB Nota bene

Nectas Network element craft terminal software

NO DATA OUT E No signal output from TxE/TxW synchronizer

NO DATA Tx No data Tx

NR Norm

NRM Normal Response Mode

NRZ Non Return to Zero

OH OverHead

OH–BUS OverHead–Bus

OK Switching alignment OK

OK COMP Channel alignment OK

OK–Rx Channel alignment indication

OKRx Rx channel comparator OK

OKTx Main Tx standby comparator OK

OOF Out Of Frame

OP MAN Manual operation in progress

OP REM Remote operation in progress

ORMIR 64 Summation of loss of received pulses alarms in 64 kbit/schannels transmit

ORMIRT Summation of loss of received pulses alarms transmit side

OSC Oscillator

OWF Overflow

P/N Positive/Negative

P Carrier

PA Alignment word

PC Personal Computer

PCD Portable Control Device

PECO Personal computer

PHASE Regular to standby channel phase difference

PL Line extension

PLL Phase Locked Loop

Pn Position in the subrack

POH Path OverHead

POL Local operator position

ppm parts per million

PR Radio link

PRED Setting

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

41

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ABBREVIATIONS FUNCTION

PRES Unit present

PRx Received power

PRx0/PRx1 Received power receiver

PS–Tx Power Supply unit alarm transceiver

PS–MOD Power Supply unit alarm modemodulators

PSU Power Supply Unit

PSU BB Power Supply unit baseband

PSU FAIL +5V power supply failure

Q0IP Primary information interface

Qn Interfacing standard

RAM Random Access Memory

RC Radio Controller

REG–Rx Received power recording

REG–Tx Transmitted power recording

REM Remote control

RES–RC Reset radiocontroller

rms root mean square

RSA Radio Section Adaptation

RSA CRASH RSA crash

RSA CRASH ALL MOD squelch command

RS232 Serial interface standard

RS422 Serial interface standard

RS485 Serial interface standard

Rx Receive/Receiver

RZ Return to Zero

Rx SOH Data received from SOH

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SEL DLY HW/SW TxL/TxR HSBY logic switching command

SELECT TxL/TxR Delay selection from HW/SW setting

SER Serial

SIM–1 Failure simulation on bearer 1

SIM–2 Failure simulation on bearer 2

SIM1–ECO Return failure simulation on bearer 1

SIM2–ECO Return failure simulation on bearer 2

SOH Section OverHead

SPV Supervisory

SRS Service and Radio Switching

ST Stackable service channel

STB Strobe command

STKn Service channel n in stackable assembly

STM1 Synchronous Transport Module level 1

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

42

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ABBREVIATIONS FUNCTION

SW Software

SX Left

Sy Synchronization

SYNC Synchronization signal

SYNC–A/B References for internal synchronizations A/B

SYNC–EXT References for 2048 kbit/s external synchronization

SYNCRx ERemote synchronizer failure

Demodulator data failure

SY8 8 kHz synchronization

SZ Setting/breaking point

TA Remote alarm

TC Remote control

TEDE Terminal degraded

TEGU Terminal faulty

TLC–1 Remote forcing on bearer 1

TLC–2 Remote forcing on bearer 2

TLC1 ECO Return remote forcing on bearer 1

TLC2 ECO Return remote forcing on bearer 2

TMN Telecommunications Management Network

TRIB Tributary

TS Telesignal

TS KR Switching position

Tx Transmit/Transmitter

Tx–SEL Tx–L or Tx–R selection

Tx SOH Data transmitted from SOH

U/OUT Output

P Microprocessor

URG Urgent

VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator

VCXO Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator

V11/V10 CCITT interface standards

W West

WD Watch–dog

2 MTx E 2 Mbit/s present in 5.184 Mbit/s SOH frame

38 MHz AGGR R/L 38 MHz clock extracted from aggregate right/left

38 MHz TRIB R/L 38 MHz clock extracted from tributary right/left

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

43

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

DESCRIPTION

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

44

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

45

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PRODUCT

2.1 INTRODUCTION

The RRA 155/N+1/R assembly (where RRA stands for Radio Regeneration Adaptation) is utilized to insertthe radio systems with regeneration function only into the Synchronous Telecommunication Networks.This assembly is available in two different versions:

– 1+1

– N+1 (7+1 max.)

The two versions use the same mechanical subrack, the only difference is the composition of the unitsinside the subrack.

1+1 Configuration

The RRA assembly in 1+1 configuration carries out the following functions:

– Protection of the radio transmission in the 1+1 configuration through hitless switching– Adaptation of the radio section through RRA (”Radio Regeneration Adaptation”), 1+1 protected with

electrical/optical interface– Flexible management of the 64kbit/s service streams contained in the STM–1 frame RSOH section– Management of the 192kbit/s stream dedicated to the TMN network (DCCR)– Centralized management of the automatic transmitted power control (ATPC channel)– Possibility to insert one or two 1+1 protected 2Mbit/s streams into the modem assembly– Software management of the whole system through an external terminal

The RRA 1+1 assembly is housed in a single subrack structure matching ETSI N3 standards; 9DIN unithigh, the subrack comes into two parts:

– The first one, 6DIN unit ETSI high, accomodates plugged–in units– The second one, 3DIN unit ETSI high, accomodates the connectors used for input/output signals,

to power feed the assembly and to house some units.

The units making up the system are plugged into the relevant slots (unit positions) corresponding to theconnectors on the wiring board (or backpanel). In turn, the latter establishes connections between theunits.

Each unit is provided with visual indicators (LEDs) stating its operating condition or reporting on possiblefailures.

Two power supply units housed in the subrack convert the battery voltage into the power supply voltagesof the units forming the subrack.

Both power supply units operate in parallel, however each one is able to power feed the subrack whenfully equipped.

The assembly is equipped with alarms visual indicators to check its operating condition. In particular, anyrelevant information and alarm signallings are processed by a logic and forwarded to the EquipmentController unit inserted into the assembly.

Moreover, the Equipment controller unit processes the radio system alarms and delivers the interfacesrequired to access the supervisory functions; it also allows detection of the faulty units to be replaced.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

46

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

N+1 Configuration (7+1 max.)

The RRA assembly in N+1 configuration carries out the following functions:

– Adaptation of the radio section through RRA (”Radio Regenerator Adaptation”), with electrical/opticalinterface, EPS–protected.

– Flexible management of the 64kbit/s service streams contained in the STM–1 frame RSOH section– Management of the 192kbit/s stream dedicated to the TMN network (DCCR)– Software management of the whole system through an operator’s terminal

The N+1 configuration is housed in two subracks as follows:

– one main subrack, up to 3+1, manages three STM–1 streams and one occasional channel (+1) orprotects the main streams.

– one 4+1 extension subrack manages four STM–1 streams and protects these signals with the spareRRA unit.

The subracks structure matches ETSI N3 standards; 9DIN unit high, they come into two parts:

– The first one, 6DIN unit ETSI high, accomodates plugged–in units– The second one, 3DIN unit ETSI high, accomodates the connectors used for input/output signals,

to power feed the assembly and to house some units.

Note that if dealing with an optical interface, an additional subrack is required to convert the optical signalinto electrical.

The units making up the system are plugged into the relevant slots (unit positions) corresponding to theconnectors on the wiring board (or backpanel). In turn, the latter establishes connections between theunits.

Each unit is provided with visual indicators (LEDs) stating its operating condition or reporting on possiblefailures.

Two power supply units housed in the subrack convert the battery voltage into the power supply voltagesof the units forming the subrack.

Although both power supply units operate in parallel, each one is able to power feed the subrack whenfully equipped.

The assembly is equipped with alarms visual indicators to check its operating condition. In particular, anyrelevant information and alarm signallings are processed by a logic and forwarded to the equipmentcontroller unit inserted into the assembly.

Moreover, the Equipment controller unit processes the radio system alarms and delivers the interfacesrequired to access the supervisory functions; it also allows detection of the faulty units to be replaced.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

47

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.2 LAYOUT

This chapter includes tables and figures showing the layout of the RRA 155/N+1/R assembly in thefollowing configurations:

• 1+1 (refer to Tab. 7. on page 48)

• 3+1 (refer to Tab. 8. on page 53)

• Extended up to 7+1 (refer to Tab. 9. on page 58)

The information is organized as follows:

• Layout tables

• Figures giving unit position

• Figures describing the installation tagblocks

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

48

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 7. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: 1+1 configuration layout

RRA 155/N+1/R, 1+1 CONFIGURATION

NAMEANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

Max

Q.ty

POS.

Ref. to

Fig. 10. page 50

Fig. 11. page 51

Fig. 12. page 52

Note REF. Fig.

O/E substitute 3CY00403AAAA(474.230.066 L)

2 P1–P3 1 Fig. 41. page 120

RRA O/E int. S1.1 FC PC 3CY00402AAAA(411.200.240 F)

2 P1–P3 1–3 Fig. 39. page 117

RRA O/E int. SC 3CY03396AAAA(411.200.289 V)

2 P1–P3 1–3 Fig. 39. page 117

RRA O/E int. DIN SM 3CY03397AAAA(411.200.290 S)

2 P1–P3 1–3 Fig. 39. page 117

RRA standard 155 3CY00401AAAA(411.200.239 S)

2 P2–P4 3 Fig. 43. page 124

RRAUX Party line 3CY02515AAAA(411.200.255 S)

1 P5 3 Fig. 55. page 149

Forcing Driver 155 3CY04943AAAA411.200.392 L

1 P12 3 Fig. 57. page 154

Equipment ControllerSMEC 2A/8R+16F

3AL34732AAAB(411.100.301 M)

1 P13 3 Fig. 59. page 160

Power Supply Unit 3CY01609AAAA478.230.002 Z

2 P14–P15 3 Fig. 61. page 163

Electrical switch 1+1/R 3CY04291AAAA(474.230.130 M)

2 P16–P18 3 Fig. 49. page 138

SPL/R 3CY04277AAAA(411.200.374 Z)

1 P7 3 Fig. 47. page 135

Hitless switch 1+1/R 3CY04282AAAA(411.200.376 T)

1 P8 3 Fig. 45. page 128

I/o extension/R 3CY04293AAAA(411.200.377 U)

1 P20 3 Fig. 63. page 166

Card Controller LAP2–600 3AL34054AAAA(483.100.045 G)

1 – 2–3 –

Service unit 3CY04278AAAA(411.200.375 S)

1 P11 3 Fig. 64. page 170

EOW REP/DT unit (DTMF) 3CY01797AAAA(411.200.195 F)

1 P9 1–3 Fig. 67. page 178

TPH DESK REP/DT unit(DTMF)

3CY02289AAAA(411.200.196 G)

1 P9 1–3 Fig. 69. page 184

VF for DTMF DT 3CY01569AAAA(411.200.209 D)

1 P9 1–3 Fig. 71. page 189

Servizio Dati TerminaleN*1200 baud

3CY07400AAAA(411.200.149 Y)

1 P9 1–3 Fig. 73. page 194

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

49

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

NAME REF. Fig.Note

POS.

Ref. to

Fig. 10. page 50

Fig. 11. page 51

Fig. 12. page 52

Max

Q.ty

ANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

Terminal multirate dataservice N*2400

3CY02526AAAA(474.282.245 M)

1 P9 1–3 Fig. 75. page 199

1+1 Subrack connections 3CY04941AAAA(299.702.281 Y)

1 – – –

3+1 RRA Enhanced

Subrack

3CY04073AAAA(593.232.006 X)

P6 – Fig. 10. page 50

Made up of:

Complete wiring board 3CY04062AAAA(487.239.018 F)

1 P10 – Fig. 12. page 52

NOTES :

1 Units with the same note are for alternative use.

2 To be installed on the RRA unit (quantity required: one each per unit)

3 Spare part.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

50

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Fig. 10. RSA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the 1+1 configuration

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

51

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RACK LAMP COMMANDS

POWER SUPPLY FROM STATION BATTERY

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 1+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH – TRIBUTARY SIDE

I/O ALARM EXTENSION

I/O HOUSEKEEPING (PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER)

NOT UTILIZED

M49

M50

M51

M52

M53

M54

M55

M56

M57

M58

M59

NOT UTILIZED

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 1+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH – AGGREGATE SIDE

NOT UTILIZED

EQUIPMENT REMOTE ALARMS TO SUPERVISION

64 kbit/s G.703 AND V.11 DATA CHANNELS TO AUX UNIT

HOUSEKEEPING, PARTY LINE TO USK UNIT

XPIC AND HDLC SIGNAL TO/FROM MODEM ASSEMBLY

SIGNALS, ALARMS, DCC AND Q0IP INTERFACE TO/FROM MODEM ASSEMBLY

RECORDINGS, ALARMS, COMMANDS, ATPC AND Q0IP INTERFACE TO/FROM

B AND C PARTY LINE PATHS TO AUX UNIT, Q0IP INTERFACE TO MSN8 (1+1 ONLY) AND

A, B, C, PARTY LINE PATHS AND EXTERNAL TELEPHONE TO USK UNIT

NOT UTILIZED

M61

M62

M63

M64

M65

M66

M67

M68

BYTE B2 MONITORING

SIGNALS/ALARMS TO EXTERNAL OPTICAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT, ADDITIONAL I/O

AND DATA CHANNELS FOR Nx1200 BAUD TERMINAL USK UNIT OR Nx2400 BAUD

TRANSCEIVER ASSEMBLY

POWER SUPPLY FROM STATION BATTERY

TERMINAL MULTIRATE USK UNIT

Fig. 11. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for 1+1 configuration

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

52

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

M57

M49 M51 M53

M60

M59 M58M56M55M54M61 M62 M63 M64 M65 M66 M67 M68

Fig. 12. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for 1+1 configuration

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

53

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 8. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: 3+1 configuration layout

RRA 155/N+1/R, 3+1 CONFIGURATION

NAMEANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

Max

Q.ty

POS.

Rif. to

Fig. 13. page 55

Fig. 14. page 56

Fig. 15. page 57

Note REF. Fig.

O/E substitute 3CY00403AAAA(474.230.066 L)

4 P1–P3–P6–P8 1 Fig. 41. page 120

RRA O/E int. S1.1 FC PC 3CY00402AAAA(411.200.240 F)

4 P1–P3–P6–P8 1–3 Fig. 39. page 117

RRA O/E int. SC 3CY03396AAAA(411.200.289 V)

4 P1–P3–P6–P8 1–3 Fig. 39. page 117

RRA O/E int. DIN SM 3CY03397AAAA(411.200.290 S)

4 P1–P3–P6–P8 1–3 Fig. 39. page 117

RRA standard 155 3CY00401AAAA(411.200.239 S)

4 P2–P4–P6–P8 3 Fig. 43. page 124

RRAUX Party line 3CY02515AAAA(411.200.255 S)

2 P5–P10 3 Fig. 55. page 149

Forcing Driver 155 3CY04943AAAA411.200.392 L

1 P12 3 Fig. 57. page 154

Equipment ControllerSMEC 2A/8R+16F

3AL34732AAAB(411.100.301 M)

1 P13 3 Fig. 59. page 160

Power Supply Unit 3CY01609AAAA478.230.002 Z

2 P14–P15 3 Fig. 61. page 163

Switch RSAelettrico3+1/4+1 Tx

3CY00680AAAA(474.230.057 K)

2 P16–P18 3 Fig. 51. page 141

Switch RSAelettrico3+1/4+1 Rx

3CY00681AAAA(474.230.058 U)

2 P17–P19 3 Fig. 53. page 144

I/o extension/R 3CY04293AAAA(411.200.377 U)

1 P20 3 Fig. 63. page 166

Card Controller LAP2–600 3AL34054AAAA(483.100.045 G)

1 – 2–3 –

Service unit 3CY04278AAAA(411.200.375 S)

1 P11 3 Fig. 64. page 170

3+1 Subrack connection 3CY04942AAAA(299.702.282 Z)

1 – – –

3+1 RRA enhanced

subrack

3CY04073AAAA(593.232.006 X)

P28 – Fig. 13. page 55

Made up of:

Complete wiring board 3CY04062AAAA(487.239.018 F)

1 P29 – Fig. 15. page 57

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

54

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

NOTES :

1 Units alternative use.

2 To be installed on the following units:RRA to manage bytes D1 to D3, line sideForcing Driver, in the presence of repeater stations, to manage bytes D1 to D3, radio side

3 Spare part.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

55

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Fig. 13. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the 3+1 configuration

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

56

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RACK LAMP COMMANDS

POWER SUPPLY FROM STATION BATTERY

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 3+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH – TRIBUTARY SIDE (TX PROT)

ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (PROVIDED BY I/O ALARM EXTENSION)

I/O HOUSEKEEPING (PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER)

NOT UTILIZED

M49

M50

M51

M52

M53

M54

M55

M56

M57

M58

M59

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 3+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH – AGGREGATE SIDE (TX PROT)

EQUIPMENT REMOTE ALARMS TO SUPERVISION

64 kbit/s G.703 AND V.11 DATA CHANNELS TO AUX UNIT 1

REMOTE ALARMS FOR PARALLEL SUPERVISION, INHIBITION SIGNALS TO BB ASSEMBLY

B AND C PARTY LINE PATHS TO AUX UNIT 2

B AND C PARTY LINE PATHS TO AUX UNIT 1 AND BYTE B2 MONITORING

64 Kbit/s G.703 AND V11 DATA CHANNELS TO AUX UNIT 2

M61

M62

M63

M64

M65

M66

M67

M68

SIGNALS/ALARMS TO EXTERNAL OPTICAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT, ALARMS AND

POWER SUPPLY FROM STATION BATTERY

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 3+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH – TRIBUTARY SIDE (RX PROT)

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 3+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH – AGGREGATE SIDE (RX PROT)

NOT UTILIZED

NOT UTILIZED

NOT UTILIZED

Fig. 14. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for 3+1 configuration

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

57

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

M57

M49 M50 M51 M52 M53

M60

M59 M58M56M55M54M61 M62 M63 M64 M65 M66 M67 M68

Fig. 15. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for 3+1 configuration

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

58

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 9. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: up to 7+1 configuration layout

RRA 155/N+1/R, up to 7+1 CONFIGURATION

NAMEANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

Max

Q.ty

POS. Ref. to

Fig. 16. page 60

Fig. 17. page 61

Fig. 18. page 62

Note REF. Fig.

O/E substitute 3CY00403AAAA(474.230.066 L)

4 P1–P3–P6–P8 1 Fig. 41. page 120

RRA O/E int. S1.1 FC PC 3CY00402AAAA(411.200.240 F)

4 P1–P3–P6–P8 1–3 Fig. 39. page 117

RRA O/E int. SC 3CY03396AAAA(411.200.289 V)

4 P1–P3–P6–P8 1–3 Fig. 39. page 117

RRA O/E int. DIN SM 3CY03397AAAA(411.200.290 S)

4 P1–P3–P6–P8 1–3 Fig. 39. page 117

RRA standard 155 3CY00401AAAA(411.200.239 S)

4 P1–P3–P5–P7–P9 3 Fig. 43. page 124

RRAUX Party line 3CY02515AAAA(411.200.255 S)

2 P10–P12 3 Fig. 55. page 149

Forcing Driver 155 3CY04943AAAA411.200.392 L

1 P11 3 Fig. 57. page 154

Equipment ControllerSMEC 2A/8R+16F

3AL34732AAAB(411.100.301 M)

1 P13 3 Fig. 59. page 160

Power Supply Unit 3CY01609AAAA478.230.002 Z

2 P14–P15 3 Fig. 61. page 163

Switch RSAelettrico3+1/4+1 Tx

3CY00680AAAA(474.230.057 K)

2 P16–P18 3 Fig. 51. page 141

Switch RSAelettrico3+1/4+1 Rx

3CY00681AAAA(474.230.058 U)

2 P17–P19 3 Fig. 53. page 144

IECB ext. 3CY06097AAAA(474.230.173 L)

1 P24 3 Fig. 80. page 206

Clock ext. receiver 3CY00679AAAA(411.200.234 M)

2 P21–P22 3 Fig. 81. page 206

Card Controller LAP2–600 3AL34054AAAA(483.100.045 G)

1 – 2–3 –

AND–OR/S 3CY03029AAAA(487.230.127 U)

1 P20 – Fig. 78. page 203

IECB ext. main/R 3CY04534AAAA(474.230.136 F)

1 P23 – Fig. 80. page 206

RRA/RSA ext. Subrackconnection

3CY04942AAAA(299.702.282 Z)

1 – – –

RRA 155 ext. subrack 3CY04073AAAA(593.232.005 W)

P25 – Fig. 16. page 60

Made up of:

Complete wiring board 3CY02756AAAA(487.239.011 Y)

1 P26 – Fig. 18. page 62

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

59

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

NOTES :

1 Units alternative use.

2 To be installed on the following units:RRA to manage bytes D1 to D3, line sideForcing Driver, in the presence of repeater stations, to manage bytes D1 to D3, radio side

3 Spare part.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

60

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

P16 P17 P18 P19

P21 P23

P22P20

P26

P25

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

P15

P24

Fig. 16. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the up to 7+1 configuration

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

61

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

64kb/s G.703 AND V.11 CHANNELS TOWARDS AUX UNIT 2, B PATH OF PARTY LINE OF

BYTE B2 MONITOR, HDLC LINE TO EXTERNAL OPTICAL SUBRACK (IF ANY),

IECB (FROM 3+1 RRA SUBRACK)

SIGNALS AND CLOCK FROM/TO IECB TERMINATION–FUNDAMENTAL (TO/FROM 3+1 RRA

POWER SUPPLY FROM STATION BATTERY

POWER SUPPLY FROM STATION BATTERY

SUBRACK GROUND

COMMANDS AND ALARMS TO/FROM ”AND/OR”

RACK LAMP COMMANDS

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM ”Tx EL. SWITCH – TRIBUTARY SIDE”

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM ”Tx EL. SWITCH – AGGREGATE SIDE”

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM ”Rx EL. SWITCH – TRIBUTARY SIDE

NOT USED

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM ”Rx EL. SWITCH – AGGREGATE SIDE”

CLOCK EXTERNAL RECEIVER 1 (FROM 3+1 RRA SUBRACK)

CLOCK EXTERNAL RECEIVER 2 (FROM 3+1 RRA SUBRACK)

SUBRACK)

NOT USEDM15

SIGNAL AND CLOCK TO/FROM EXP. TERM. IECB (TO BB EXP. SUBRACK)

64kb/s G.703 AND V.11 CHANNELS TOWARDS AUX UNIT 1, B PATH OF PARTY LINE OFAUX UNIT 2 TO 3+1 RRA SUBRACK, C PATH OF PARTY LINE TO AUX UNIT 1

AUX UNIT 2 TO EXP. BB, C PATH OF PARTY LINE TO AUX UNIT 2

NOT USED

NOT USEDM14

Q2/LTS INTERFACE, PLC AUX1 AND PLC AUX2 CONNECTIONS, DCCR TO RSOH BB(RADIO SIDE), FAILURE INHIBITION TO BBM40

M65

ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (OR SUBRACK ALARMS)

Fig. 17. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for up to 7+1 configuration

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

62

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

M7

M8

M9

M4

M10

M2

M3

M13

M16M17M6M5

14 14

9

M12M15M14

M40

M65

M18

Fig. 18. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for up to 7+1 configuration

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

63

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

The values specified in the following paragraphs are typical; the guaranteed values are those included inthe contract documents.

2.3.1 Electrical / optical characteristics

2.3.1.1 Main Characteristics

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Electrical interfaces CCITT Rec. G.703

SDH frame and multiplexing structures CCITT Recs. G.707, G.708, G.709

Equipment functions CCITT Rec. G.783

Optical interfaces CCITT Rec. G.958

Protections EPS power supply (1+1)RRA (1+1)

APS radio bearers (hitless)services (non–hitless)

MANAGEMENT INTERFACES

Craft interface (PC) RS232 9 pin D,PC–compatible

(PCD) interface RS485 asynchronous

TMN interface Qx G.773/QB3

MANAGEMENT INTERFACES FUNCTIONS

• Alarm check, equipment configuration, performance monitoring, administrative securityfunction (password), maintenance memory for any equipment events.

• Equipment software downloading onto non volatile memories, without traffic interruptions.

UNITS AND EQUIPMENT ACKNOWLEDGMENT

• Through remote inventory collector, not supported in this release.

AUXILIARY USER SIGNALS (housekeeping)

I max when set to ON 50 mA

V max when set to ON –76 V

Voltage drop towards ground when setto ON

≤–2 V

Protection for each of these signals by 100 V – 1 W Zener diode

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

64

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.3.1.2 Unit characteristics

RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC

Optical interface S1–1 (see Tab. 10. on page 64 for its characteristics)

Bit rate 155.520 Mbit/s

Optical connectors DIN SC/FC (until for alternative use)

Optical protection according to CCITT Rec. G.958

Tab. 10. STM–1 optical interface characteristics

CHARACTERISTICSMEASURING

UNITVALUES

DIGITAL SIGNAL - Nominal bit rate kbit/s Recs G.707 and G.958 STM–1

Code (Table 1/G.957) S1–1

Wave length nm 1260–1360

TRANSMITTER, POINT S

Transmission medium MLM

Spectrum characteristics

RMS max. amplitude – 20 dB max. amplitude minimum side mode suppression ratio

nmnmdB

7.7––

Average transmitted power

max min

dBmdBm

–8–15

Minimum extinction ratio (absorption) dB 8.2

OPTICAL LINE BETWEEN POINTS S AND R

Attenuation dB 0–12

Max. dissipation ps/nm 96

Mini. cable attenuation loss in point S, includingconnectors

dB NA

Max discrete reflection between points S and R dB NA

RECEIVER, POINT R

Min. sensitivity dBm –28

Min. overload dBm –8

Max. optical line penalty dB 1

Max. receive return loss in point R dB NA

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

65

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

O/E substitutive unit

Interface type electrical, according to CCITT Rec. G.703

Bit rate 155.520 Mbit/s

Input signal bit rate 155 Mbit/s

Input signal equalization 0–12.7 dB at 78 MHz, variable according to the f.

Input signal code CMI

Pulse shape according to CCITT mask G.703

RRA standard 155

Interface type electrical, according to CCITT Rec. G.703

Bit rate 155.520 Mbit/s

Input signal code CMI

Pulse shape according to CCITT mask G.703

1+1 hitless switch

Bit rate 155.520 Mbit/s ± 4.6 ppm

Input/output code CMI

Input/output interface CCITT G.703

Input/output impedance 75 ohms unbalanced

Input return loss 15 dB, 8 to 240 MHz

Static delay equalization, Rx side 0–60 bits (in 1 bit steps)

Automatic delay equalization, Rx side 16 bits

Max. dynamically recoverable delay ± 16 bits

SPL

• SWITCHING FUNCTION

Switching logic 1+1

Alignment time 1 ms (2 ms)

Switching time following alarmdetection

≤ 10 ms (including alignment time)

Fast switching time following alarmdetection

≤ 1 ms (including alignment time)

Recovery time (t.b.d.)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

66

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

SwitchingOperating mode

Switchingcommand Priority order

SW forcing ManualSwitch controlled

KR 1 + 1 1) ALL DEM/ATL1) MIR channel

from D.F. from HSW Hitless switch

2) HBER3) EWH4) EWL

Radio bearers switching

K–RRA 1) MIR (electricalswitch)

from D.F. from HSW Electrical switch

1) MIR (HSWswitch)

2) Fail RRA

RRA protection

K–2 1) MIR 2 Mbit/s from D.F. –– 2 Mbit/s switchMbit/KR–SYNC 2) ALL DEM

3) HBER 2 Mbit/s protection

Tx SELECT 1) ALL Tx2) ALL MOD

from D.F. –– Hot standby switch

3) ALL 2 Mbit(SW settable)

RF switching management

SW forcing from D.F.

Manual operations Hitless switch–Electrical switch

Switching management RESTORAL – NON RESTORAL(SW presettable)

Switching channels interface CEPT

Active–ON–1 ≤ V ≤ 03 mA ≤ I ≤ 10 mA

Inactive–OFF–72 V ≤ VI ≤ 0.2 mA

• TRANSMITTED POWER MANAGEMENT

ATPC channel byte # 3.2 (64 kbit/s)1+1 protected

Code NRZ + CK

Level and impedance V11 (contradirectional)

• DIALOGUE WITH THE SPL REMOTE UNIT (ATPC)

Max. no. of transmitters controlled 2 (if the remote unit is SPL)2 (if the remote unit is ATPC)

Max. no. of XPIC inhibitions 2 (if the remote unit is SPL)2 (if the remote unit is ATPC)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

67

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Electrical switch

• INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL

Level 1 Vpp

Impedance 75 ohms

Interface CMI Rec. G.703

Bit rate 155.520 Mbit/s (user’s side)155.520 Mbit/s (carrier side)

AUX party line

• VOICE CHANNEL INTERFACE (Front–mounted jack)

Impedance 600 ohms

Holding current 18 mA

Tx level 0 dB

Rx level –4 dB

Call coding DTMF, according to CCITT Rec. Q.23

• PARTY LINE SECTION

3 digital speech paths carrier side, user’s side

2 analog speech paths 2–wire balancedimpedance 600 ohmslevel –3 to –10 dB

Data channels with external access 3x64 kbit/s codirectional G.7033x4800 baud, contradirectional V11

• 3x64 kbit G.703

Bit rate 64 kbit/s

Timing signal 64 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s codirectionally transmitted

Transmission medium 2 balanced pairs (120 ohms) for each direction

Code HDB3 G.703

• 3x9600 baud CONTRADIRECTIONAL

Interface type electrical, according to CCITT Rec. V11 (contr.)

Impedance 600 ohms

Rx level ”1” or ”OFF” < –0.3 V”0” or ”ON” > +0.3 V

• 5.1 Mbit/s INTERFACE

Interface type electrical, contradirectional V11

Impedance 600 ohms

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

68

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

• LINE TONES

Dial tone 450 Hz continuous

Busy tone 450 Hz 0.2/0.2 sec. interrupted

Break–in tone 450 Hz 0.2/0.2/0.2/1 sec. timed

Power supply unit

Primary power supply voltage –48 to –60 Vcc ± 20%

Secondary power supply voltages +5.3 V ± 3%–5.5 V ± 3%+12.1 V ± 4%

Max. power drain ≤ 125 W

Yielding 75%

Driver Forcing

• SERIAL LINES

HDLC interface RS485 2/4–wires, SW presettable

Q0IP interface RS485 balanced/unbalanced presettable

IECB N & L interface FUTURE BUS standard (only IECB–L used)

PECO interface RS232 ASYNCHRONOUS (not available)

Q2LTS interface RS485 ASYNCHRONOUS (not developed)

M1 interface RS485 ASYNCHRONOUS(presettable to alternate F.Q2LTS interface)

PCD interface RS485 ASYNCHRONOUS(presettable to alternate PECO interface)

C.C. interface FUTURE–BUS standard for IECB NCMOS levels for DCCR and DCCM channels

ERI interface CMOS levels

CMOS interface 17 inputs with CMOS levels32 outputs with CMOS levels

Analog measurements interface 16 inputs with 1 Kohm impedance1 front input with 1 Kohm impedance

I/O extension

Alarms/remote commands open collector (CEPT interface)

”active” closed contact–1 ≤ V ≤ 03 mA ≤ I ≤ 10 mA

”inactive” open contact–72 ≤ VI ≤ 0.2 mA

Number of alarms 48

Number of remote commands 20

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

69

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Service unit

– IECB termination

Standard Future Bus

Impedance 39 ohms

Data level 0 V + 1 V

Termination 2 V

Clock 1 V – 2 V

Local Operator’s set w/o loudspeaker/Terminal BCA speech service

– User side

• PARTY LINE

Transmitted bandwidth 300 to 3400 Hz

Impedance 600 Ω balanced

Symmetry attenuation 46 dB

Tx level (path B and path C) –3 dBm

Tx level (path A) +12/–3 dBm

Rx level (path B and path C) –3 dBm

Rx level (path A) –3/–18 dBm

Crosstalk –60 dBm

Amplitude/frequency distortion within CCITT G.712.1 limits

Group delay within CCITT G.712.2 limits

Noise within CCITT G.712.4 limits

Out–of–band signals attenuation within CCITT G.712.5 limits

Intermodulation within CCITT G.712.7 limits

Gain/level variation within CCITT G.712.10 limits

Path A of the party line has 0.5dB to 15dB attenuators adjustable in 0.5dB steps.The 3F and 4F signallings of the party line have a CEPT interface.

• WIRES ”A” AND ”B”

Transmitted bandwidth 300 to 3400 Hz

Impedance 600 Ω balanced

Microphone current 20 mA

Tx level 0 dBm

Rx level –4 dBm

Rx level (DTMF) –4 dBm/–7 dBm (strappable)

Amplitude/frequency response within CCITT G.713.1 limits

Group delay within CCITT G.713.2 limits

Noise within CCITT G.713.4 limits

Out–of–band signals attenuation within CCITT G.713.5 limits

Gain/level variation within CCITT G.713.9 limits

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

70

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Signalling decadic impulsive/DTMF(Recs. Q22/Q23)

Free tone 450 Hz continuous

Busy tone 450 Hz 0.2/0.2 sec

Call control tone 450 Hz 0.8/2.4 sec

Inclusion tone 450 Hz 0.2/0.2/0.2/1 sec

Number of users 54 (decadic impulsive)99/999 (DTMF)

Buzzer command CEPT interface

Call generator frequency 28 Hz

Call generator level 48 Vrms

Desk type telephone standard BCA with key

Line maximum resistancemicrotelephone included

1000 Ω

– Line terminal side

Bit rate 64 kbit/s 100 ppm

Code codirectional CCITT Rec. G.703

Levels codirectional CCITT Rec. G.703 masks

Impedance 120 Ω balanced

Return loss 4 to13 kHz 20 dB13 to 256 kHz 25 dB256 to 384 kHz 24 dB

Maximum input attenuation 3 dB in f at 128 kHz

Jitter CCITT Rec. G.823

E/M signalling CEPT interface

VF for DTMF DT

– User Party Line service

Branching capacity 3 paths + 1 local

Tx band 300 3400 Hz

Impedance 600 ohm balanced

Tx level (path “B” and “C”) –3 dBm

Rx level (path “B” and “C”) –3 dBm

Tx level (path “A”) –3 +12.5 dB

Rx level (path “A”) –3 –18.5 dB

– Line terminal side

Bit rate 64 kbit/s 100 ppm

Code codirectional CCITT Rec. G.703

Levels codirectional CCITT Rec. G.703 masks

Impendance 120 ohm balanced

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

71

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

TPH DESK DTMF repeater/D.T.

– User side

Tx band 300 3400 Hz

Tx level 0 dB 0.5

Rx level –4 dB 0.5

Microph. current 20 mA

Impedance 600 ohm

Signalling DTMF Q23 CCITT

Number of selectable users 10 99

User Id. presettable inside the unit

Line tones:

Selective call 28 Hz; 0.8/2.4 s

Conference call 28 Hz; 0.8/0.8 s

Free 450 Hz; continuous tone

Busy 450 Hz; 0.2/0.2 s

Call check 450 Hz; 0.8/2.4 s

Cut–in 450 Hz; 0.2/0.2/0.2/1 s

Visual indications free line, call–busy line

Forced line release push–button type

– User Party Line service

Branching capacity 3 paths + 1 local

Tx band 300 3400 Hz

Impedance 600 ohm balanced

Tx level (path ”B” and ”C”) –3 dBm

Rx level (path ”B” and ”C”) –3 dBm

Tx level (path ”A”) –3 +12.5 dB

Rx level (path ”A”) –3 –18.5 dB

– Line terminal side

Bit rate 64 kbit/s 100 ppm

Code codirectional CCITT Rec. G.703

Levels codirectional CCITT Rec. G.703 masks

Impedance 120 ohm balanced

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

72

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

8x1200baud data service

– User side

Transmit capacity 7 RS232 1200 baud streams + 1 RS232 1200 baudstreams for TTC supervision system continuity pilot

Levels CCITT Recs. V24/V28

– Line terminal side

Bit rate 64 kbit/s 100 ppm

Code CCITT codirectional Rec. G.703

Levels CCITT codirectional Rec. G.703 masks

Impedance 120 Ω/balanced

Return loss 4 to 13 kHz 20 dB13 to 256 kHz 25 dB256 to 384 kHz 24 dB

Max input attenuation 3 dB in f at 128 kHz

Jitter CCITT Rec. G.823

E/M signalling CEPT interface

Multirate data service

– User’s side

• Transmit capacity:

– one 9600baud data stream with interface RS232 (V24/V28) or V11

– one 4800baud data stream with interface RS232 (V24/V28) or V11

– two 2400baud data streams with interface RS232 (V24/V28) or V11

– Line terminal side

Bit rate 64 kbit/s 100 ppm

Code CCITT codirectional Rec. G.703

Levels CCITT codirectional Rec. G.703 masks

Impedance 120 Ω /balanced

Return loss 4 to 13 kHz 20 dB13 to 256 kHz 25 dB256 to 284 kHz 24 dB

Maximum input attenuation 3 dB in f at 128 kHz

Jitter CCITT Rec. G.823

E/M signalling CEPT interface

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

73

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.3.1.3 Alarms characteristics

Except for the DC/DC converter, each unit in the RRA 155 1+1 assembly is equipped with a red LED onits front cover. When ON, the unit is defective. The converter unit instead is provided with a green LEDthat turns OFF whenever a failure is detected (note that the plug–in units mounted in the connectors areahave no visual indicators).

All the units alarms are collected by the equipment controller unit which supply centralized visualindications.

Visual indications are:

– red LED (5), indicates an urgent alarm– red LED (6), indicates a non urgent alarm– yellow LED (8), indicates an abnormal operating condition such as a switch manually blocked, a

temporary manual reactivation of a laser for testing purposes; an active loopback;– yellow LED (9), displays an indicative alarm

Depending on the type of alarm, the equipment controller and the service units also generate the red LEDsturn ON commands (RNURG and RURG) located on the rack cap housing the assembly.

Alarm conditions (if any) can be memorized through pushbutton (2), thus causing the summarizing redLEDs to turn OFF and the rack yellow LED to turn ON, together with yellow LED (7) on the equipmentcontroller unit’s front cover.

If one or both station batteries fail, the alarm can also be memorized automatically. The equipmentcontroller unit also provides the following remote alarms for external use:

– R, indicates OR’ing of all equipment alarms– URG, indicates an urgent alarm– NURG, indicates a non urgent alarm– TORC, indicates failure or lack of one of the power supply units. It is the OR’ing of PFAIL R/l– TANC, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) failure of all the power supply units– TUP, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) that the equipment controller is alarmed– IND, displays an indicative alarm– LOSQ2, indicates lack of connection with the TMN network– EXT, indicates an external alarm– INT, indicates an internal alarm– SWT, indicates that switching took place– OR–TR2, indicates lack of the 2Mbit/s input trib.

The ANDOR/2 unit supplies the following remote alarms:

– TOR, indicates failure or lack of one station battery– TAND, indicates failure or lack of both station batteries

Interface characteristics given below apply to all the remote alarms mentioned above. They are EM–typeand feature:

Maximum current guaranteed when closed 50 mA

Maximum voltage tolerance when open –76 V

Voltage drop to ground when closed ≤ –2 V

Protection of each remote alarm by 100V/1W Zener diodes

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

74

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Besides, the equipment controller can establish dialogue with a Personal Computer (PC) for maintenance,initial turn–on and troubleshooting operations. Connector (3) on the unit front cover connects theequipment controller unit to the PC.

The DF unit dialogues with all the system units/assemblies featuring a Q0IP interface. The DF unittransfers all information obtained through the Q0IP interface towards the EC unit. In this system, the ECunit operates as MASTER, whereas the DF one operates as SLAVE.

The equipment can also be connected to an operative system (OS) inside a TMN (TelecommunicationsManagement Network) to carry out reciprocal operations.

2.3.1.4 Power supply characteristics

Primary and secondary power supply voltages are reported below.Power drains refer to the primary voltage.

Primary power supply voltage –48 to –60 Vdc ± 20%

Secondary power supply voltages andmax. current drains

–5.4 V ± 3% 8.5 A+5.5 V ± 3% 9.5 A+12.1 V ± 3%

Assembly power drain 87 W approx (1+1 configuration)

130 W approx (3+1 configuration)

87 W approx (up to 7+1 configuration)

2.3.2 Mechanicals characteristics

The RRA assembly features the following characteristics:

Height 400 mm

Width 480 mm

Depth 240 mm

Weights 22 kg max.

2.3.3 Environmental characteristics

Environmental conditions

As per ETSI 300–019–1–3 standard, class 3.2 dealing with extreme temperatures ranging from –5°C to+45°C. However, regular operating conditions guaranteed even when ranging from 0°C to +50°C. Referto the climatic charts of Fig. 19. on page 75 and Fig. 20. on page 75.

EMC Characteristics

As per the EWC Norms pertaining to ETSI 300385 (deals with EN 55022 – class A indoor equipment andwith EN 55022 – class B outdoor equipment).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

75

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

60

50

40

20

0

–20

–40

0 20 40 60 80 100

AIR

TE

MP

ER

AT

UR

E (

C)

AB

SO

LUT

E A

IR H

UM

IDIT

Y (

g/m

)3

RELATIVE HUMIDITY (%)

55

–5

5

REGULAR OPERATINGCONDITIONS GUARANTEEING

PERFORMANCE

EXTREME OPERATING

2,9

1,0

PERFORMANCE

CONDITIONS DETERIORATING

95

o

Fig. 19. Operating Climatic Chart

60

40

20

0

–20

–40

–60

0 20 40 60 80 100

RELATIVE HUMIDITY (%)

2,9

0,03

AIR

TE

MP

ER

AT

UR

E (

C)

AB

SO

LUT

E A

IR H

UM

IDIT

Y (

g/m

)3

°

Fig. 20. Storage Climatic Chart

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

76

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.4 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.4.1 1+1 configurationSee Fig. 21. on page 85, Fig. 22. on page 86, Fig. 23. on page 87, Fig. 24. on page 88 and Fig. 25. onpage 89.

The configuration shown in Fig. 22. on page 86, where two optical/electrical interface are used, have tobe analaysed in the system in which will be inserted, to garantee the correct functionality of the externalprotetions of the radio. Then this configuration must be approuted by the Technical Support.

The RRA 155/N+1/R assembly in 1+1 configuration is made up of the following units, some of which arefor alternative use.

– RRA O/E INT. S1.1 FC/PC– RRA O/E INT SC– RRA O/E INT DIN– O/E substitute unit– RRA standard 155– Hitless switch 1+1/R– SPL/R– Electrical switch 1+1/R– RRAUX party line– Forcing Driver 155– Equipment Controller SMEC 2A/8R + 16F– Power supply unit– I/O extension/R– Service– EOW REP/DT unit (DTMF)– TPH Desk Rep/DT unit (DTMF)– VF for DTMF DT– Terminal station 8x1200 baud data service– Terminal station multirate data service

2.4.1.1 RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC RRA O/E INT SC RRA O/E INT DIN See Fig. 22. on page 86.

These units optically interface the STM–1 input signal and forward the CMI interconnection electric signaltowards unit RRA. The three units difference is based on the type of connector being used.

2.4.1.2 O/E substitute unitSee Fig. 21. on page 85.

Scope of the O/E substitutive unit is to deliver the physical accesses for the main signal, on both user’sand radio sides. Moreover, it establishes connection towards the RRA through subrack connections(backpanel). Locally, it only carries out a transit function for the main signal.

Coaxial connections (1), (2), (3), (4) are located on the unit front cover.

2.4.1.3 RRA standard 155See Fig. 21. on page 85 and Fig. 22. on page 86.

The RRA standard 155 unit bidirectionally interfaces the user’s side (155Mbit/s signal) and delivers the155Mbit/s signals from/towards the hitless switch.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

77

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

In the transmit section, the unit receives a 155Mbit/s signal, with G.703 characteristics.Function of the unit is to multiplex the regenerator section (RST) as per the G.703 recommendation onsynchronous multiplexing. Thus, the unit makes the access assembly available to the RSOH submatrix.

In the receive section, the unit receives a CMI characterized STM–1 stream and carries out the same RSTfunction as in Tx, still as per Rec. G.703.

The unit extracts the 38 CRU LI and 38 CRU RA, available as references to the CRU unit.

Moreover, it also receives the IECB N&L, INT 5.1Mbit/s and DCCR–CK–SYNC signals locally managedas follows:

INT 5,1 Mbit/s Represented by a bidirectional bus, supports the traffic of the AUX–managedbytes

DCCR–CK–SYNC Gives serial (DCCR) access to bytes D1–D2–D3, when the supervision is external

IECB N & J Represented by two serial buses and managed by the card controller, it carries outthe following functions:

IECB L, channel used to swap messages between E.C and C.C

IECB N, used by both E.C and C.C as channel dedicated to the TMN messagesfor the DCCR streams.

Card Controller LAP 2/600 can set up dialogue with the equipment controller, swapping any informationon alarms, presettings, operating conditions and activation of the unit alarm.

Moreover, a block referred to as ”Remote inventory” stores the unit inventory data (part number, serialnumber, manufacturing date).

2.4.1.4 Hitless switchSee Fig. 21. on page 85.

Function of the hitless switch unit is to implement automatic switching to ensure the system reliability andperformance. The following protection is provided:

– APS (Automatic Protection Switching) at the radio channel level.

In the transmit section, the hitless switch unit receives one STM–1 signal at point (4) from RRA L or RRAR, and returns at points (3) – (2) two CMI signals to modulators.

The switch unit receives at points (5) – (6) the two CMI signals coming from demodulators and returnsat point (7) the CMI signal to be sent to the aggregate units.

The two received signals reach the receive switch, that switches the radio bearers over hitlessly, thanksto the phase alignment process implemented in the two bearers. The switch receives the KR 1+1command from the SPL unit to perform these switching operations.

The STM–1 signal present after the switch is sent to the electrical switch unit and then is split by a hybridcircuit and made available for its interconnection to RRA L and RRA R. Manual/automatic switchingoperations are possible through switch (8); whenever the manual mode is selected, yellow LED (9) is ON.

Operating conditions relevant to selected channel ”0 and 1” are displayed in correspondence with switchespositions (green LEDs (10) and (11)).

Signal failure after the receive switch or at the demodulators signal inputs activates alarm (12); whereasalarm (13) is set in case of unit failure.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

78

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.4.1.5 SPL/RSee Fig. 23. on page 87.

The Switching and Power Logic (SPL) unit carries out the following functions: controls switching, managesthe Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function, and backs–up the system presettings(EEPROM).

The SPL unit manages switching either automatically or remotely, in the ”restoral” and ”non restoral”modes (software presettable).

When automatically operated, the SPL unit receives the switching criteria from transceivers,modemodulators, RRA, and hitless switches; Having determined each channel’s weight, it generates theswitching commands: SELECT Tx/Rx, K–RRA, KR 1+1, K–2 Mbits/s / KR–SINC, used for: HST logic, RRAprotection, hitless switch respectively. Remote forcing inhibits the automatic functions, causing theswitching commands to be software managed.

The transmitted power control is managed either automatically or manually (according to the D.F. softwarepresetting).

The following functions are performed automatically:

– Reception of the signals relevant to the receivers incoming power– Generation of the transmitted power regulation commands, to be multiplexed in the 64 kbit/s ATPC

stream (byte 3.2)– Reception of commands to adjust the power to be transmitted, forwarded by the ATPC stream (byte

3.2).

Power can be manually modified step by step with software presettings.

XPIC unit inhibitions are generated by the information received on the ATPC stream.

The SPL unit dialogues with D.F. through an HDLC protocol Q0IP interface to transfer information,commands and alarms. A pushbutton inside the unit resets the program stored in the microprocessor.

A visual alarm indicator (1) located on the unit front cover displays any unit failure.

Moreover, a block referred to as ”Remote Inventory” stores the unit inventory data (part number, serialnumber, manufacturing date).

2.4.1.6 Electrical switch/1+1See Fig. 21. on page 85 and Fig. 22. on page 86.

The electrical switch/electrical SMB switch unit protects the RRA functions and bidirectionally interfacesthe user.

In the transmit section, the unit receives a G.703 CMI signal on point (1) and splits it onto points (2) and(3).

In the receive section, it receives two G.703 CMI signals at points (4) and (5) and through the K–RRAcommand forwarded by the SPL unit, selects one to output it on point (6).

2.4.1.7 RRAUX party lineSee Fig. 23. on page 87.

The RRAUX party line unit carries out the following functions: services interface, 5.1 Mbit/s signalformation/management, order–wire service and CK–SY–SWC management.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

79

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

– Services interface:– The unit provides six data channels, out of which three are 64 kbit/s codirectional G.703 and three

contradirectional V.11 interfaced, as well as one order–wire–channel offering the following telephoneservices: selective call, local operator’s position, party–line, and external extension.

– SOH formation/management:– The unit offers two 5.1 Mbit/s bidirectional interfaces to the RRA and two 5.1 Mbit/s bidirectional ones

to an external user who, when present, acts as MASTER towards AUX. If RRAUX and RRA areinterconnected, 5.1Mbit/s interfaces let the RRAUX managed bytes transit; On the other hand, if AUXis interconnected to an external equipment, the bytes managed by the latter can transit towards theRRAUX unit. The SOH management block inserts the individual data channels into their respectiveRSOH bytes and protects the 5.1 Mbit/s streams from/to RRA. Selection of the RRAUX managedbytes is made by software programming. It also decides on which direction the byte should beconnected to.At the receive end, reciprocal operations are performed on the data streams comingfrom the RRA units for services extraction.

– Order–wire service:– Communication between any two users is supported by:

• green LED (1), indicating free line• yellow LED (2), indicating busy line (ON steady) or an incoming selective call (blinking)• yellow LED (3), indicating an incoming conference call• T–key (4), engaging the line• R–key (5), resetting the line• socket (6), inserting the handset.

The user, having checked that the line is free, inserts the keyboard handset into socket (6), engages theline (T–key 4) and dials the number required.

An order–wire extension is also provided in a party–line configuration for connection to an external user(e.g.: operator for outdoor transceiver).

The RRAUX party line unit manages the services through software selection.

The unit outputs an alarm at point (7) in case of failure.

Moreover, a block referred to as ”Remote Inventory” stores the unit inventory data (part number, serialnumber, manufacturing date).

2.4.1.8 Forcing driver 155See Fig. 25. on page 89.

The forcing driver 155 unit is designed to generate the SW BUS and DR BUS switching commands. Thesecommands are simultaneously sent to the Tx/Rx protection switch and clock external driver units tomonitor operation of the two switching circuits.

To do so, the unit is equipped with a switching commands processing circuit that supplies the SW BUSand DR BUS signals according to both alarms and commands found at its input and according toprestabilized priorities.

The circuit specifically receives at its input:

– Alarms: all the alarm roots detected on the RRA units (Tx and Rx side) of the various channels– Commands: forcing commands forwarded by the equipment controller through IECB bus and

software–activated.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

80

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

– Manual: command generated by turning ON manual selector switch (1) on the unit front cover toselect the channel that must occupy the standby one.Selection of manual operation causes yellow LED (5) to turn ON.

Priority for the above mentioned signals is:

– manual commands (priority 1)– software commands (priority 2)– alarms (priority 3)

Depending on the channel selected by the commands processing circuit, green/yellow LED (4) on the frontcover will be ON.

Moreover, the forcing driver 155 unit is equipped with a card controller subunit which establishes dialoguewith the equipment controller and causes unit alarm LED (6) to turn ON.

2.4.1.9 Equipment Controller SMEC 2ASee Fig. 25. on page 89.

The Equipment Controller (EC) unit manages through appropriate interfaces:

– dialogue with the units accommodated in the subrack, to collect alarms and to send softwarepresettings (IECB N & L) (S interface)

– dialogue with a Mediation Device for network management operations (Q2 interface)– dialogue with an Operation System for network management operations (Q3 interface)– local dialogue with a Portable Control Device or a properly programmed personal computer

(NECTAS software) (F interface)– various equipment alarm interfaces, including remote alarms, parallel contacts, and LEDs (A

interface).

The following pushbuttons and LEDs are located in the unit:

– pushbutton (2), stores the alarms;– pushbutton (1), globally resets the unit;– pushbutton (10), tests all LEDs located on the front cover;– red LED (5), indicates an urgent alarm;– red LED (6), indicates a non–urgent alarm;– yellow LED (8), indicates an anomalous condition;– yellow LED (9), displays an indication alarm;– red LED (10), indicates an alarm inside the Equipment Controller unit;– yellow LED (7), indicates the alarm memorization status.

Moreover, a block referred to as ”Remote Inventory” stores the unit inventory data (part number, serialnumber, manufacturing date).

2.4.1.10 Power Supply unitsSee Fig. 24. on page 88.

The two Power Supply Units receive a DC input voltage ranging from –24V to –60V and output the –5V,+5V, and –12V DC voltages required to operate all the units.

A main ON/OFF switch, a green visual indicator displaying regular operation and three test sockets forthe three output voltages, are located on the front cover of each power supply unit.

The two power supply units ensure correct operation of the assembly, even if one of them fails.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

81

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.4.1.11 ServiceSee Fig. 25. on page 89.

This unit includes the following circuits:

AND OR

This circuit detects any power supply failure in the station battery for generation of the criteria driving bothrack lamps and remote alarms.

Failure detection in either one or both station batteries activates the OR and AND alarm criteria, convertedin turn into control signals for the rack lamps (RNURG and RURG) and for the remote alarms (TOR andTAND).

Q3 interface

This circuit connects the equipment to the supervisory system, through a frontal connector. It outputs aQ3 interface to an Ethernet system.

IECB – termination

This circuit performs the termination of buses L–IECB, N–IECB, CK–L, CK–N.

Clock external driver

This circuit receives the 38.88 MHz clocks from RRA0 unit and RRA1 unit (Line Side and Radio Side) andselects the clock to be sent to the AUX party line unit.

2.4.1.12 I/O extensionSee Fig. 25. on page 89.

The unit operates as a parallel interface towards the supervisory system, thus making available 48 alarmsand 24 remote commands. Dialogue between the I/O extension and the EC unit is serial.

Alarms and remote commands are available at point (1) of the I/O extension unit.

A Q0IP–LIKE interface is used to communicate with the EC.

2.4.1.13 Terminal and Repeater Local Operator’s Set without loudspeaker serviceReference is made to Fig. 23. on page 87.

This unit operating as a service channel is provided with a telephone handset made up of a local operator’sset, selective call, party line, codecoder and a 1+1 switching logic. The local operator’s set generates atwoway speech signal with E/M signalling and can be connected with a telephone handset and anotherremote operator’s set.

Through the 155Mbit/s line the selective call permits to establish a connection with another operator. Thisconnection may be either selective or in conference. The unit is provided with line engaged ((4)) and linereset ((7)) pushbuttons as well as with visual indicators designating line busy ((5)) or line free ((6)).

The party line constitutes a node wherein speech and signalling from four different internal and externalorigins converge; they are combined with each other. The Tx speech signal thus generated is encodedat 64kbit/s as per CCITT Recommendation G.703 and sent over two distinct paths. Similarly signal M issent to the respective outputs.

At the receive end the unit receives two 64kbit/s signals and two signalling paths E1 and E2.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

82

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

On the basis of external and internal alarm criteria the 1+1 speech logic selects the signals with the bestquality. The speech and signalling signals are sent to the party line to be distributed to the selective callacknowledging the call and then to the operator’s set.

The 1+1 speech logic with serializer communicates with external equipment through serial bus Q0IP andcauses alarm LED (9) to turn ON in case of a unit fault.

2.4.1.14 TPH DESK DTMF Repeater/D.T.Reference is made to Fig. 23. on page 87.

The TPH DESK DTMF Repeater/D.T. unit operates as speech service channel for the repeater (or dualterminal) through byte E2, thus making the following access points available: microtelephone, BCAtelephone, 3–path speech.

Dialogue with another operator can be established through the selective call DTMF (Dual Tome MultiFrequency) via the 155 Mbit/s line. This connection can be of the selective or conference type. Cut–in (2)and line reset (5) keys are also present along with LEDs (3) and (4) indicating the state of the line i.e., eitherfree or engaged.

The party line constitutes a node to which are conveyed speech and call indications from four different localand external sources.

Logics 1+1 (concerned with directions W/E and E/W) allow, on the basis of the unit’s external and localalarm criteria to select the best quality signals. The speech and signalling signals are sent to the party lineto be branched off, to the selective call to acknowledge the call, and finally to the operator’s set.

The unit communicates with the external source towards D.F. through interface Q0IP. Moreover, the unit’salarm is indicated through the unit’s front cover LED (6).

The unit also includes a block to store the inventory data (P/N, serial number and date of construction)of the unit, referred to as “Remote Inventory”.

2.4.1.15 VF for DTMF DTReference is made to Fig. 23. on page 87.

The VF (VCE FREQ) DTMF REP/D.T. unt. operates as speech service channel for the repeater (or dualterminal) through byte E2, thus making three speech paths available.

The party line constitutes a node to which are conveyed speech and call indications from four different localand external sources.

Logics 1+1 (of directions W/E and E/W) allow, on the basis of the unit’s external and local alarm criteriato select the best quality signals. The speech and signalling signals are sent to the party line to be branchedoff.

The unit communicates with the external source towards D.F. through interface Q0IP. Moreover, the unit’salarm is indicated through the unit’s front cover LED (6).

The unit also includes a block to store the inventory data (P/N, serial number and date of construction)of the unit, referred to as “Remote Inventory”.

2.4.1.16 8x1200baud data service

The terminal 8x1200baud data service unit is type bidirectional and from external equipment it receivesseven 1200baud streams and a pilot frequency all having the RS232 serial format.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

83

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

These signals are converted from RS232 into NRZ and multiplexed before being interfaced as per thecodirectional 64kbit/s G.703 standard. Besides, they are split over two different outputs Tx 64 P1 and Tx64 P2 that are connected to the corresponding SOH units.

At the receive end, they are received in correspondence with two codirectional 64kbit/s signals Rx 64 P1and Rx 64 P2. These two signals are converted to NRZ and demultiplexed. Then depending upon theswitching commands supplied by the 1+1 logic, one of the two signals is selected. The signals areregenerated before being applied to an RS232 interface towards external equipment.

The 1+1 logic with serializer receives internal, external and remote alarm criteria. On the basis of thesecriteria it generates switching commands. Besides, through a Q0IP bus it communicates with externalequipment.

A selection is made out of local and external timing signals or timing signals extracted from the receivedsignals. Upon a unit internal alarm LED (1) turns ON.

2.4.1.17 Terminal multirate data service

By means of interface RS232 or V11 this unit delivers the following data channels to the user:

– 2x2400bauds– 1x4800bauds– 1x9600bauds

Selection is made by means of strap setting. The data channels are sampled and multiplexed to a transmit64kbit/s channel, whereas the opposite takes place at the receive end.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

84

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

N.B. Positions refer to the drawings of in para 2.2 ”LAYOUT” on page 47.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

85

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RST

EX

TR

AC

T.IN

SER

TIO

N

RR

A S

TAN

DA

RD

L

RST

EX

TR

AC

T.IN

SER

TIO

N

RR

A S

TAN

DA

RD

RE

LE

CT

RIC

AL

SW

ITC

H

Q0I

P T

O/F

RO

M R

CC

O/E

SUB

STIT

UT

IVE

RU

NIT

O/E

SUB

STIT

UT

IVE

L

UN

IT

TO 155Mbit/s CMIMODULATORS

FROM 155Mbit/s CMIDEMODULATORS

Q0I

P IN

T.

MA

NU

AL/

AU

TOM

AT

IC

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

1+1

HIT

LES

S S

WIT

CH

INT.

Q0I

P

P8

RX

P18

4 2T

X

35

6

ELE

CT.

SW

ITC

H

INT.

Q0I

P

8

1213

4

17

6 5

P1

P16

P3

P2 P4

INT

5.1

Mbi

t/s

Fig. 21. 1+1 version block diagram: RRA and switch with single electrical interface

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

86

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RST

EX

TR

AC

T.IN

SER

TIO

NR

SOH

RST

EX

TR

AC

T.IN

SER

TIO

NR

SOH

RR

A O

/E I

NT

S1.

1 L

RR

A S

TAN

DA

RD

L

RR

A S

TAN

DA

RD

R

RR

A O

/E I

NT

S1.

1 R

12 12

P1

P3

P4P2

TO 155Mbit/s CMIMODULATORS

Q0I

P IN

T.

MA

NU

AL/

AU

TOM

AT

IC

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

1+1

HIT

LES

S S

WIT

CH

INT.

Q0I

P

P8

RX

P18

4 2T

X

35

6

ELE

CT.

SW

ITC

H

INT.

Q0I

P

8

1213

4

17

6 5

OE

OE

OE

OE

Fig. 22. 1+1 version block diagram: RRA and switch with dual optical interface

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

87

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

SW–C

RIT

ER

IA +

AG

C +

AT

PC C

OM

. FR

OM

/TO

WA

RD

S T

RA

NSC

EIV

ER

EX

TE

NSI

ON

5.1W

–E M

bit/s

CO

NT

RA

DIR

. IN

T. F

RO

M/T

OW

AR

DS

RR

A L

/R

”CA

LL

”

SOH

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT C

OD

IRE

CT

ION

AL

64kb

it/s

CO

DIR

EC

TIO

NA

LG

703

V11

IN

T.

MIC

RO

PRO

CE

SSO

R MO

DE

MO

DU

LA

TO

RS

SW–C

RIT

ER

IA

RE

CO

RD

ING

RR

A S

W–C

RIT

ER

IA

XPI

C IN

HIB

ITIO

N/F

OR

CIN

G

INT

FR

OM

/TO

WA

RD

S/D

F

HIT

LE

SS S

WIT

CH

SW

–CR

ITE

RIA

TO

WA

RD

S M

OD

EM

5.1W

–E M

bit/s

CO

NT

RA

DIR

. IN

T. F

RO

M/T

OW

AR

DS

RR

A L

/R

SPE

EC

HL

OG

IC1+

1

”CA

LL

”

A/B

WIR

E

AC

B T

EL

.SE

T

3–W

AY

VO

ICE

INT.

Q0I

P

TPH

DE

SK D

TM

F R

epea

t./D

.T.

PAR

TY

LIN

E

E2

W/E

SPE

EC

HL

OG

IC1+

1E

/W

E2

AU

X P

AR

TY

LIN

E E

/W

P7

M62

M67

M68

M68

M66

M61

P9

M63

G70

3 IN

T.

64 k

bit/s

SPE

EC

HL

OG

IC1+

1

3–W

AY

VF

DT

MF

Rep

eat./

D.T

.

PAR

TY

LIN

E

W/E

SPE

EC

HL

OG

IC1+

1E

/W

E2

INT.

Q0I

P

E2

AU

X P

AR

TY

VO

ICE

LIN

E E

/W

M63

P9

Fig. 23. 1+1 version block diagram: Services and management

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

88

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

TO UNITS TO UNITS

POW

ER

SUPP

LY

POW

ER

SUPP

LY

P14

P15

M59

M58

Fig. 24. 1+1 version block diagram: Power Supply

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

89

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

PAR

AL

LE

L R

EM

OT

EA

LA

RM

S

I/O

HO

USE

KE

EE

PIN

G

RA

CK

LA

MPS

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NT

RO

LL

ERMIC

RO

PRO

CE

SSO

R

UN

ITA

LA

RM

MG

MT

SWIT

CH

ING

CO

MM

AN

DS

PRO

CE

SSO

R

FOR

CIN

G D

RIV

ER

155

FRO

M/T

OW

AR

DS

UN

IT

SER

VIC

EP1

1

M55

M54

M57

M57

RA

CK

LA

MP

I/O

EX

TE

NSI

ON

M53

PAR

AL

LE

LR

EM

OT

EA

LA

RM

SP1

3

M67

P12

CL

OC

KC

K38

L0

CK

38L

1

CK

38R

0C

K38

R1

EX

TE

RN

AL

DR

IVE

R

CK

38T

O A

UX

PAR

TY

LIN

E

Q3

INT

ER

FAC

E

Fig. 25. 1+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

90

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.4.2 3+1 configurationSee Fig. 26. on page 96, Fig. 27. on page 97, Fig. 28. on page 98, Fig. 29. on page 99, Fig. 30. on page100, Fig. 31. on page 101.

The RRA 155/N+1/R assembly in 3+1 configuration is made up of the following units, some of which arefor alternative use.

– RRA O/E INT S1.1 SC– RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC– RRA O/E INT DIN– O/E substitutive unit– RRA standard 155– 3+1/4+1 Tx electrical switch– 3+1/4+1 Rx electrical switch– RRAUX party line– Forcing driver 155– Equipment Controller– Power supply unit– I/O Extension/R– Service

2.4.2.1 RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC RRA O/E INT SC RRA O/E INT DIN See Fig. 26. on page 96, Fig. 27. on page 97.

These units optically interface the STM–1 input signal and forward the CMI interconnection electric signaltowards unit RRA. The three units difference is based on the type of connector being used.

2.4.2.2 O/E substitutive unitSee Fig. 28. on page 98, Fig. 29. on page 99.

Scope of the O/E substitutive unit is to deliver the physical accesses for the main signal, on both user’sand radio sides. Moreover, it establishes connection towards the RRA through subrack connections(backpanel). Locally, it only carries out a transit function for the main signal.

Coaxial connections (1), (2), (3), (4) are located on the unit front cover.

2.4.2.3 RRA standard 155See Fig. 26. on page 96, Fig. 27. on page 97, Fig. 28. on page 98, Fig. 29. on page 99.

The RRA standard 155 unit bidirectionally interfaces the user’s side (155Mbit/s signal) and delivers the155Mbit/s signals from/towards the hitless switch.

In the transmit section, the unit receives a 155Mbit/s signal, with G.703 characteristics.

Function of the unit is to multiplex the regenerator section (RST) as per the G.703 recommendation onsynchronous multiplexing. Thus, the unit makes the access assembly available to the RSOH submatrix.

In the receive section, the unit receives a CMI characterized STM–1 stream and carries out the same RSTfunction as in Tx, still as per Rec. G.703.

The unit extracts the 38 CRU LI and 38 CRU RA, available as references to the CRU unit.

Moreover, it also receives the IECB N&L, INT 5.1Mbit/s and DCCR–CK–SYNC signals locally managedas follows:

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

91

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

INT 5,1 Mbit/s Represented by a bidirectional bus, supports the traffic of the AUX–managedbytes

DCCR–CK–SYNC Gives serial (DCCR) access to bytes D1–D2–D3, when the supervision is external

IECB N & J Represented by two serial buses and managed by the card controller, it carries outthe following functions:

IECB L, channel used to swap messages between E.C and C.C

IECB N, used by both E.C and C.C as channel dedicated to the TMN messagesfor the DCCR streams.

Card Controller LAP 2/600 can set up dialogue with the equipment controller, swapping any informationon alarms, presettings, operating conditions and activation of the unit alarm. Moreover, a block referredto as ”Remote inventory” stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial number, manufacturing date).

2.4.2.4 3+1/4+1 Tx/Rx electrical protection switchSee Fig. 28. on page 98, Fig. 29. on page 99.

The Tx/Rx protection switch units have been designed to protect the RRA units from failures. Placedbetween the input/output on the user’s side and the input/output on the radio side, they can access thesignals through points (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7), (8), (9) on the front cover. These units operate both inthe 3+1 main and the 4+1 extension configurations.

2.4.2.5 RRAUX party lineSee Fig. 30. on page 100.

The AUX party line unit carries out the following functions: services interface, 5.1 Mbit/s signalformation/management, order–wire service and CK–SY–SWC management.

The RRA 155/n+1 is equipped with a max. of two AUX units: the first one manages the services towardsRRA 0–1 and the second towards RRA 2–3. (applies to the 3+1 max. configuration).

The AUX unit only manages the RSOH section inside the 5.1Mbit/s interface.

– Services interface: The unit provides six data channels, out of which three are 64 kbit/s codirectionalG.703 and three contradirectional V.11 interfaced, as well as one order–wire channel offering thefollowing telephone services: selective call, local operator’s position (POL), party–line, and externalextension (availability refers to each pair of 155Mbit/s channels, e.g.CH0/CH1 and CH2/CH3).

– SOH formation/management: The unit offers two 5.1 Mbit/s bidirectional interfaces from/to the RRA.If AUX and RRA are interconnected, 5.1Mbit/s interfaces let the AUX managed bytes transit. TheSOH management block inserts the individual data channels into their respective RSOH bytes insidethe 5.1Mbit/s streams from/to RRA. The AUX–managed bytes are software selected. The directionto which the byte should be connected is also decided at that stage. In the receive section, reciprocaloperations are performed on the data streams coming from the RRA units for services extraction.The AUX unit manages the services from/towards the operator’s side.

– Order–wire service: Communication between any two users is supported by:

• green LED (1), indicating free line• yellow LED (2), indicating busy line (ON steady) or an incoming selective call (blinking)• yellow LED (3), indicating an incoming conference call• T–key (4), engaging the line• R–key (5), resetting the line• socket (6), inserting the handset.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

92

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

The user, having checked that the line is free, inserts the keyboard pad into socket (6), engages the line(T–key 4) and dials the number required. An order–wire extension is also provided in a party–lineconfiguration for connection to an external user (e.g.: operator for outdoor transceiver).

The E1 speech service can be rerouted to various directions through the speech extension of AUX1towards AUX2. Moreover, the second AUX unit gives access to additional 64kbit/s services such as threeV11 and three G.703 channels towards RRA 2 and 3.

The unit outputs an alarm at point (7) in case of failure. Moreover, a block referred to as ”remote inventory”stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial number, manufacturing date).

2.4.2.6 Forcing driver 155See Fig. 31. on page 101.

The forcing driver 155 unit is designed to generate the SW BUS and DR BUS switching commands. Thesecommands are simultaneously sent to the Tx/Rx protection switch and clock external driver units tomonitor operation of the two switching circuits.

To do so, the unit is equipped with a switching commands processing circuit that supplies the SW BUSand DR BUS signals according to both alarms and commands found at its input and according toprestabilized priorities. The circuit specifically receives at its input:

– Alarms: all the alarm roots detected on the RRA units (Tx and Rx side) of the various channels– Commands: forcing commands forwarded by the equipment controller through IECB bus and

software–activated.– Manual: command generated by turning ON manual selector switch (1) on the unit front cover to

select the channel that must occupy the standby one. Selection of manual operation causes yellowLED (5) to turn ON.

Priority for the above mentioned signals is:

– manual commands (priority 1)– software commands (priority 2)– alarms (priority 3)

Depending on the channel selected by the commands processing circuit, green/yellow LED (4) on the frontcover will be ON.

Moreover, the forcing driver 155 unit is equipped with a card controller subunit which establishes dialoguewith the equipment controller and causes unit alarm LED (6) to turn ON.

2.4.2.7 Equipment Controller SMEC 2ASee Fig. 31. on page 101.

The Equipment Controller (EC) unit manages through appropriate interfaces:

– dialogue between the units accommodated in the subrack, to collect alarms, send softwarepresettings (IECB N & L) and manage DCC streams (S interface)

– dialogue with a Mediation Device for network management operations (Q2 interface)– dialogue with an Operation System for network management operations (Q3 interface)– local dialogue with a Portable Control Device or a properly programmed personal computer

(NECTAS software) (F interface)– various equipment alarm interfaces, including remote alarms, parallel contacts, and LEDs (A

interface).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

93

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

The following pushbuttons and LEDs are located on the unit:

– pushbutton (2), stores the alarms;– pushbutton (1), globally resets the unit;– pushbutton (10), tests all LEDs located on the front cover;– red LED (5), indicates an urgent alarm;– red LED (6), indicates a non urgent alarm;– yellow LED (8), indicates an anomalous condition;– yellow LED (9), displays an indication alarm;– red LED (10), indicates an alarm inside the Equipment Controller unit;– yellow LED (7), indicates the alarm memorization status.

Moreover, a block referred to as ”remote inventory” stores the unit inventory data (part number, serialnumber, manufacturing date).

2.4.2.8 Power Supply unitsSee Fig. 24. on page 88.

The two power supply units receive a DC input voltage ranging from –24V to –60V and output the –5V,+5V, and –12V DC voltages required to operate all the units.

A main ON/OFF switch, a green visual indicator displaying regular operation and three test sockets forthe three output voltages, are located on the front cover of each power supply unit. The two power supplyunits ensure correct operation of the assembly even if one of them fails.

2.4.2.9 Service unitSee Fig. 31. on page 101.

This unit includes the following circuits:

AND OR

This circuit detects any power supply failure in the station battery for generation of the criteria driving bothrack lamps and remote alarms.

Failure detection in either one or both station batteries activates the OR and AND alarm criteria, convertedin turn into control signals for the rack lamps (RNURG and RURG) and for the remote alarms (TOR andTAND).

Q3 interface

This circuit connects the equipment to the supervisory system, through a frontal connector. It outputs aQ3 interface to an Ethernet system.

IECB – termination

This circuit performs the termination of buses L–IECB, N–IECB, CK–L, CK–N and sends them to BBassembly and to Expansion assembly.

Clock external driver

This circuit receives the 38.88 MHz clocks from RRA0, RRA1, RRA2 and RRA3 units (Line Side) andselects the clock to be sent to AUX party line unit and to the Expansion assembly.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

94

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.4.2.10 I/O extensionSee Fig. 31. on page 101.

The unit operates as a parallel interface towards the supervisory system, thus making available 48 alarmsand 24 remote commands. Dialogue between the I/O extension and the EC unit is serial.

Alarms and remote commands are available at point (1) of the I/O extension unit.

A Q0IP–LIKE interface is used to communicate with the EC.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

95

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

N.B. Positions refer to the drawings of in para 2.2 ”LAYOUT” on page 47.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

96

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RADIO SIDE

P3

P6

P8

P1

RST

INSE

RT

ION

EX

TR

AC

TI.

P4

P7

P9

P2

P8

P1

P3

P6

OE

OE

EO E

O

RR

A O

/EU

NIT

RR

A O

/EU

NIT

Fig. 26. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Tx side (optical unit)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

97

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RADIO SIDE

P3

P6

P8

P1

P4

P7

P9P2

P8

P3

P6

P1

OE

RR

A O

/EU

NIT

RR

A O

/EU

NITO

E

OE

OE

Fig. 27. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Rx side (optical unit)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

98

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tx

PRO

T. S

WU

NIT

O/E

SU

BST

ITU

TIV

ER

x PR

OT.

SW

RADIO SIDE

UN

ITO

/E S

UB

STIT

UT

IVE

P17

P3

P6

P8

P1

RST

INSE

RT

ION

EX

TR

AC

TI.

P4

P7

P9

P2

P8

P1

P3

P6

P16

Fig. 28. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Tx side

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

99

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RADIO SIDE

Tx

PRO

T. S

WU

NIT

O/E

SU

BST

ITU

TIV

EU

NIT

O/E

SU

BST

ITU

TIV

ER

x PR

OT.

SW

P18

P3

P6

P8

P1

P4

P7

P9P2

P8

P3

P6

P19

P1

Fig. 29. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Rx side

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

100

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

SID

EO

PER

AT

OR

’S

INT.

5.1

Mbi

t/s T

O/F

RO

M R

RA

2

INT.

5.1

Mbi

t/s T

O/F

RO

M R

RA

3

SPE

EC

H E

XT

EN

SIO

NM

AT

RIX

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

”CA

LL

”

SID

EO

PER

AT

OR

’S

INT.

5.1

Mbi

t/s T

O/F

RO

M R

RA

1

INT.

5.1

Mbi

t/s T

O/F

RO

M R

RA

0

MA

TR

IXC

ON

NE

CT

ION

SPE

EC

HE

XT

EN

SIO

N

”CA

LL

”

CO

NT

RA

DIR

EC

TIO

NA

L64

Kbi

t/s

V11

IN

T.C

ON

TR

AD

IRE

CT

ION

AL

64 K

bit/s

V11

IN

T.

CO

DIR

EC

TIO

NA

L64

Kbi

t/s

G.7

03 I

NT.

CO

DIR

EC

TIO

NA

L64

Kbi

t/s

G.7

03 I

NT.

P10

M65

P5

M61

M62

–2 PA

TH

C

M66

–4

PA

TH

C

M62

–1M

66–3

PA

TH

B

Fig. 30. 3+1 version block diagram: Services management

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

101

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NT

RO

LL

ERM

ICR

OPR

OC

ESS

OR

UN

ITA

LA

RM

MG

MT

SWIT

CH

ING

CO

MM

AN

DS

PRO

CE

SSO

R

FOR

CIN

G D

RIV

ER

155

FRO

M/T

OW

AR

DS

UN

IT

PAR

AL

LE

L R

EM

OT

EA

LA

RM

S

I/O

HO

USE

KE

EE

PIN

G

RA

CK

LA

MPS

M55

M54

M57

I/O

EX

TE

NSI

ON

M53

PAR

AL

LE

LR

EM

OT

EA

LA

RM

S

SER

VIC

EP1

1

M57

RA

CK

LA

MPS

M67

P12

CL

OC

KC

K38

RR

A0

CK

38 R

RA

1

CK

38 R

RA

2C

K38

RR

A3

EX

TE

RN

AL

DR

IVE

R

TO

E

XPA

NSI

ON

TO

Q3

INT

ER

FAC

E

IEC

BT

O B

B 534

IEC

B

TO

EX

PAN

SIO

N

AU

X P

.L.

21

Fig. 31. 3+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

102

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.4.3 Up to 7+1 configurationSee Fig. 32. on page 107, Fig. 33. on page 108, Fig. 34. on page 109, Fig. 35. on page 110, Fig. 36. onpage 111, Fig. 37. on page 112.

The RRA 155/N+1/R assembly in 3+1 configuration is made up of the following units, some of which arefor alternative use.

– RRA O/E INT S1.1 SC– RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC– RRA O/E INT DIN– O/E substitutive unit– RRA standard 155– 3+1/4+1 Tx electrical switch– 3+1/4+1 Rx electrical switch– RRAUX party line– Forcing driver 155– Equipment Controller– Power supply unit– AND–OR– IECB – termination– Clock external receiver

2.4.3.1 RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC RRA O/E INT SC RRA O/E INT DIN See Fig. 32. on page 107, Fig. 33. on page 108.

These units optically interface the STM–1 input signal and forward the CMI interconnection electric signaltowards unit RRA.

The three units difference is based on the type of connector being used.

2.4.3.2 O/E substitutive unitSee Fig. 34. on page 109, Fig. 35. on page 110.

Scope of the O/E substitutive unit is to deliver the physical accesses for the main signal, on both user’sand radio sides. Moreover, it establishes connection towards the RRA through subrack connections(backpanel). Locally, it only carries out a transit function for the main signal.

Coaxial connections (1), (2), (3), (4) are located on the unit front cover.

2.4.3.3 RRA standard 155See Fig. 32. on page 107, Fig. 33. on page 108, Fig. 34. on page 109, Fig. 35. on page 110.

The RRA standard 155 unit bidirectionally interfaces the user’s side (155Mbit/s signal) and delivers the155Mbit/s signals from/towards the hitless switch.

In the transmit section, the unit receives a 155 Mbit/s signal, with G.703 characteristics. Function of theunit is to multiplex the regenerator section (RST) as per the G.783 recommendation on synchronousmultiplexing. Thus, the unit makes the access assembly available to the RSOH submatrix.

In the receive section, the unit receives a CMI characterized STM–1 stream and carries out the same RSTfunction as in Tx, still as per Rec. G.783.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

103

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

The unit extracts the 38 CRU LI and 38 CRU RA, available as references to the CRU unit. Moreover, italso receives the IECB N&L, INT 5.1Mbit/s and DCCR–CK–SYNC signals locally managed as follows:

INT 5,1 Mbit/s Represented by a bidirectional bus, supports the traffic of the AUX–managedbytes

DCCR–CK–SYNC Gives serial (DCCR) access to bytes D1–D2–D3, when the supervision is external

IECB N & J Represented by two serial buses and managed by the card controller, it carries outthe following functions:

IECB L, channel used to swap messages between E.C and C.C

IECB N, used by both E.C and C.C as channel dedicated to the TMN messagesfor the DCCR streams.

Card Controller LAP 2/600 can set up dialogue with the equipment controller, swapping any informationon alarms, presettings, operating conditions and activation of the unit alarm. Moreover, a block referredto as ”Remote inventory” stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial number, manufacturing date).

2.4.3.4 3+1/4+1 Tx/Rx electrical protection switchSee Fig. 34. on page 109, Fig. 35. on page 110.

The Tx/Rx protection switch units have been designed to protect the RRA units from failures. Placedbetween the input/output on the user’s side and the input/output on the radio side, they can access thesignals through points (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7), (8), (9) on the front cover. These units operate both inthe 3+1 main and the 4+1 extension configurations.

2.4.3.5 RRAUX party lineSee Fig. 36. on page 111.

The AUX party line unit carries out the following functions: services interface, 5.1 Mbit/s signalformation/management, order–wire service and CK–SY–SWC management.

The RRA 155/n+1 is equipped with a max. of two AUX units: the first one manages the services towardsRRA 4–5 and the second towards RRA 6–7.

The AUX unit only manages the RSOH section inside the 5.1Mbit/s interface.

– Services interface: The unit provides six data channels, out of which three are 64 kbit/s codirectionalG.703 and three contradirectional V.11 interfaced, as well as one order–wire channel offering thefollowing telephone services: selective call, local operator’s position (POL), party–line, and externalextension .

– SOH formation/management: The unit offers two 5.1 Mbit/s bidirectional interfaces from/to the RRA.If AUX and RRA are interconnected, 5.1Mbit/s interfaces let the AUX managed bytes transit. TheSOH management block inserts the individual data channels into their respective RSOH bytes insidethe 5.1Mbit/s streams from/to RRA. The AUX–managed bytes are software selected. The directionto which the byte should be connected is also decided at that stage. In the receive section, reciprocaloperations are performed on the data streams coming from the RRA units for services extraction.

– Order–wire service: Communication between any two users is supported by:

• green LED (1), indicating free line• yellow LED (2), indicating busy line (ON steady) or an incoming selective call (blinking)• yellow LED (3), indicating an incoming conference call• T–key (4), engaging the line• R–key (5), resetting the line• socket (6), inserting the handset.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

104

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

The user, having checked that the line is free, inserts the keyboard pad into socket (6), engages the line(T–key 4) and dials the number required. An order–wire extension is also provided in a party–lineconfiguration for connection to an external user (e.g.: operator for outdoor transceiver).

The unit outputs an alarm at point (7) in case of failure. Moreover, a block referred to as ”remote inventory”stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial number, manufacturing date).

2.4.3.6 Forcing driver 155See Fig. 37. on page 112.

The forcing driver 155 unit is designed to generate the SW BUS and DR BUS switching commands. Thesecommands are simultaneously sent to the Tx/Rx protection switch and clock external driver units tomonitor operation of the two switching circuits.

To do so, the unit is equipped with a switching commands processing circuit that supplies the SW BUSand DR BUS signals according to both alarms and commands found at its input and according toprestabilized priorities.

The circuit specifically receives at its input:

– Alarms: all the alarm roots detected on the RRA units (Tx and Rx side) of the various channels– Commands: forcing commands forwarded by the equipment controller through IECB bus and

software–activated.– Manual: command generated by turning ON manual selector switch (1) on the unit front cover to

select the channel that must occupy the standby one. Selection of manual operation causes yellowLED (5) to turn ON.

Priority for the above mentioned signals is:

– manual commands (priority 1)– software commands (priority 2)– alarms (priority 3)

Depending on the channel selected by the commands processing circuit, green/yellow LED (4) on the frontcover will be ON.

Moreover, the forcing driver 155 unit is equipped with a card controller subunit which establishes dialoguewith the equipment controller and causes unit alarm LED (6) to turn ON.

2.4.3.7 Power Supply unitsSee Fig. 24. on page 88.

The two power supply units receive a DC input voltage ranging from –24V to –60V and output the –5V,+5V, and –12V DC voltages required to operate all the units.

A main ON/OFF switch, a green visual indicator displaying regular operation and three test sockets forthe three output voltages, are located on the front cover of each power supply unit. The two power supplyunits ensure correct operation of the assembly even if one of them fails.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

105

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.4.3.8 AND–OR/SSee Fig. 37. on page 112.

This unit detects any failure in the station battery power supply for generation of the controls driving bothrack lamps and remote alarms.

Failure detection in either one or both station batteries sets off the OR and AND alarm criteria, turned inturn into control signals for the rack lamps (RNURG and RURG) and for the remote alarms (TOR andTAND).

2.4.3.9 IECB – terminationSee Fig. 37. on page 112.

This unit adapts the levels refering to the L–IECB, N–IECB, CK–L, CK–N, and OH–BUS buses (accordingto the futurebus standard), made available for possible expansions to come.

2.4.3.10 Clock external receiverSee Fig. 37. on page 112.

This unit receives on the front panel an encoded signal (38 MHz clock and 2 kHz synchronism).

The signal is decoded, buffered and then the clock signal and the synchronism are sent to the AUX unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

106

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

N.B. Positions refer to the drawings of in para 2.2 ”LAYOUT” on page 47.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

107

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RADIO SIDE

P8

P6

P4

P2

RST

INSE

RT

ION

EX

TR

AC

TI.

P7

P5

P3

P1

P4

P2

P8

P6

OE

OE

EO E

O

RR

A O

/EU

NIT

RR

A O

/EU

NIT

SWC

RR

A 4

SOH

4C

K 3

8 L

I 4

SWC

RR

A 5

SOH

5

CK

38

LI

5

SWC

RR

A 6

SOH

6

CK

38

LI

6

SOH

7C

K 3

8 L

I 7

SWC

RR

A 7

Fig. 32. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Tx side (optical unit)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

108

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RADIO SIDE

P8

P6

P4

P2

P7

P5

P3P1

P4

P8

P6

P2

OE

RR

A O

/EU

NIT

RR

A O

/EU

NITO

E

OE

OE

SWC

RR

A 4

SOH

4C

K 3

8 L

I 4

SWC

RR

A 5

SOH

5

CK

38

LI

5

SWC

RR

A 6

SOH

6

CK

38

LI

6

SOH

7

CK

38

LI

7

SWC

RR

A 7

Fig. 33. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Rx side (optical unit)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

109

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tx

PRO

T. S

WR

x PR

OT.

SW

RADIO SIDE

UN

ITSU

BST

ITU

TIV

EP1

7

P2

P4

P6P8

RST

INSE

RT

ION

EX

TR

AC

TI.

P1

P3

P5P7

P6

P8

P2

P4

P16

P9

ch.7

ch.6

ch.5

ch.4

SWC

RR

A 7

SOH

7C

K 3

8 L

I 7

SWC

RR

A 6

SOH

6C

K 3

8 L

I 6

SWC

RR

A 5

SOH

5C

K 3

8 L

I 5

SOH

4C

K 3

8 L

I 4

SWC

RR

A 4

O/E

UN

ITSU

BST

ITU

TIV

E

O/E

SWC

RR

A

SOH

C

K 3

8 L

I

Fig. 34. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: RRA 4+1 with spare, Tx side

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

110

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RADIO SIDE

Tx

PRO

T. S

WR

x PR

OT.

SW

P18

P2

P4

P6

P8

P1

P3

P5P7

P6

P2

P4

P19

P8

P9

SWC

RR

A 7

SOH

7C

K 3

8 L

I 7

SWC

RR

A 6

SOH

6C

K 3

8 L

I 6

SWC

RR

A 5

SOH

5C

K 3

8 L

I 5

SOH

4C

K 3

8 L

I 4

SWC

RR

A 4

ch.7

ch.6

ch.5

ch.4

UN

ITSU

BST

ITU

TIV

E

O/E

UN

ITSU

BST

ITU

TIV

E

O/E

SWC

RR

A

SOH

C

K 3

8 L

I

Fig. 35. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: RRA 4+1 with spare, Rx side

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

111

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

SID

EO

PER

AT

OR

’S

INT.

5.1

Mbi

t/s T

O/F

RO

M R

RA

6

INT.

5.1

Mbi

t/s T

O/F

RO

M R

RA

7

SPE

EC

H E

XT

EN

SIO

NM

AT

RIX

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

”CA

LL

”

SID

EO

PER

AT

OR

’S

INT.

5.1

Mbi

t/s T

O/F

RO

M R

RA

5

INT.

5.1

Mbi

t/s T

O/F

RO

M R

RA

4

MA

TR

IXC

ON

NE

CT

ION

SPE

EC

HE

XT

EN

SIO

N

”CA

LL

”

CO

NT

RA

DIR

EC

TIO

NA

L64

Kbi

t/s

V11

IN

T.C

ON

TR

AD

IRE

CT

ION

AL

64 K

bit/s

V11

IN

T.

CO

DIR

EC

TIO

NA

L64

Kbi

t/s

G.7

03 I

NT.

CO

DIR

EC

TIO

NA

L64

Kbi

t/s

G.7

03 I

NT.

P12

M6

P10

M5

M5/

4 PA

TH

C

M6/

4

PA

TH

C

M5/

3M

6/3

PA

TH

B(T

O3+

1R

RA

)

PA

TH

B(T

OB

BE

XP.

)M40

/2

Fig. 36. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Service management

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

112

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

P23

3

1

M4

M65

IEC

B–T

ER

MIN

AT

ION

IEC

BS

WIT

CH

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

155

FO

RC

ING

DR

IVE

R

M7

I/O H

OU

SE

KE

EP

ING

, BY

TE

B2

MO

NIT

OR

ING

, HD

LC L

INE

TO

EX

T. O

PT.

SU

BR

AC

K

RA

CK

LA

MP

S

EX

TE

NS

ION

EX

TE

RN

AL

IEC

B

P24

CO

MM

AN

DP

RO

CE

SS

ING

4IE

CB

6

RE

SE

TDR

BU

S

SW

BU

S

5

AU

TM

AN

2

CH

4

CH

5

CH

7

CH

6

IEC

B L

&N

SW

C R

SA

INT

ER

NA

L

M9

P11

P14

P15

M16

M17

+V.

BA

TT.

–V.B

AT

T.

+V.

BA

TT.

–V.B

AT

T.–V

.BA

TT.

+V.

BA

TT.

+V.

BA

TT.

–V.B

AT

T.

PS

U

PS

U

+5.

3V

+5.

3V

TO

UN

ITS

TO

UN

ITS

CLO

CK

–SY

ALA

RM

P21

ALA

RM

CLO

CK

–SY

CK

38

SY

NC

2F

RO

M 3

+1

RR

A S

UB

RA

CK

1 1

FR

OM

3+

1 R

RA

SU

BR

AC

K

MG

MT

MG

MT

MG

MT

P22

MG

MT

IEC

B–T

ER

MIN

AT

ION

CLO

CK

–EX

T

RE

CE

IVE

R 1

CLO

CK

–EX

T

RE

CE

IVE

R 2

CK

38

SY

NC

2

M13

AN

D/O

R

P20

(FR

OM

3+

1 R

RA

)

Fig. 37. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

113

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

– THE 6 BYTES OF THE A1 = 11110110 AND A2 = 00101000 TYPE CONSTITUTE THE ALIGNMENT WORD(48 DIGITS)

– THE B1 BYTE, RESULTING FROM BIP–8.

– THE THREE B2 BYTES, RESULTING FROM BIP–24.

– E1 AND E2 ARE UTILIZED FOR SERVICE TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN REGENERATORSAND TERMINALS RESPECTIVELY

– D1–D3 ARE UTILIZED AS ONE 192kbit/s CHANNEL FOR DATA COMMUNICATION(DCC = DATA COMMUNICATION CHANNEL) BETWEEN REGENERATORS

– D4–D12 ARE UTILIZED AS ONE 576kbit/s CHANNEL FOR DATA COMMUNICATION (DCC) INTHE TMN NETWORK

– F1 IS UTILIZED TO TRANSMIT A DATA CHANNEL RECEIVED FROM THE AUX/EOW UNIT.

– K1 AND K2 ARE UTILIZED FOR APS (AUTOMATIC PROTECTION SWITCHING)INDICATIONS AND FOR THE FERFTx AND AIS ALARMS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLEXERS.

– Z1 AND Z2 ARE NOT STANDARDIZED.

– THE M1 BYTE INDICATES MULTIPLEXER SECTION FEBE.

– THE S1 BYTE INDICATES THE QUALITY OF THE SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL.

– BYTE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE.

– BYTES RESERVED FOR FUTURE INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS,ADDITIONAL NATIONAL USE, ETC.

– BYTES INDICATING THE TRANSMISSION MEDIUM (MEDIA DEPENDENT BYTES)

– S BYTES USED AS FOLLOWS:

BYTE C1, INDICATES THE STM–1 TRIBUTARY INSIDE AN STM–N SIGNAL

BYTE J0, (REGENERATION SECTION TRACE), IDENTIFIES THE RADIO CHANNEL

9 COLUMNS 261 COLUMNS

AU POINTERS 9ROWS

Fig. 38. SOH structure

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

114

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5 UNITS DESCRIPTION

The following paragraphs describe the main units making up the RRA 155 assembly.

Each paragraph deals with one unit specifying : functional description, block diagram and a frontcoverplate operating points map.

The description that follows applies to the units reported below:

– RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC– RRA O/E INT SC– RRA O/E INT DIN– O/E substitutive unit– RRA standard 155– Hitless switch 1+1/R– SPL/R– Electrical switch 1+1/R– RRAUX party line– Forcing Driver 155– Equipment Controller SMEC2A/8R + 16F– Power supply unit– I/O extension/R– Service– 3+1/4+1 Tx electrical switch– 3+1/4+1 Rx electrical switch– EOW REP/DT unit (DTMF)– TPH Desk Rep/DT unit (DTMF)– VF for DTMF DT– Terminal station 8x12000 baud data service– Terminal station multirate data service– AND OR/S– IECB termination– Clock external receiver

LEGEND OF THE FOLLOWING FIGURES

n Number identifying the position of the operative points on the units/modules.

N.B. At the end of each unit description operative presetting indications are reported , i.e., only forthose units whose setting options have been customized, or include presettable sub–units.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

115

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.1 RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC RRA O/E INT S1.1 SC RRA O/E INT S.1.1 DINSee to Fig. 39. on page 117 and Fig. 40. on page 118.

This description applies to the following versions of optical units:

– RRA O/E interface S1.1 FC–PC– RRA O/E interface S1.1 SC– RRA O/E interface S1.1 DIN SM

The units are functionally identical to each other but for the different optical connectors with which theyare equipped (FC, SC and DIN respectively).

The units are equipped with:

– Short Haul S1.1 optical interface: value 1.1 states that the Laser operates in the second window (1.3nm).

These versions of the optical tributary unit use a short–haul optical module, the electrical characteristicsof which can be found in para. 2.3 ”TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS” page 63.

The unit optically/bidirectionally interfaces the line outputting 155 Mbit/s STM–1 streams, radio side,through the bidirectional electric interface.

In section A, a 155 Mbit/s optical signal with G.957 requirements inputs the unit at point (2). The opticalsignal is O/E converted into an NRZ+CK electrical signal and generates alarm MIR–A in case of inputsignal failure. Afterwards, the NRZ/CMI Converter circuit converts the input signals into CMI code therebyoutputting a 155 Mbit/s signal towards the rear connector.

Loss of Tx pulses is detected through the MIT alarm. The cited circuit squelches the Tx data upon receivingthe SQUELCH_A command.

In section B, a 155 Mbit/s electrical signal with G.703 requirements inputs the unit from a rear connector.The CMI electrical signals are NRZ/CMI converted into NRZ+CK signals and produces alarm MIR–B incase of input signal failure. The presence of the detected MIR–B alarm switches OFF the Laser.Afterwards, the NRZ+CK signals are O/E converted by the O/E circuit and accessed at point (1). Basedon the SHUTDOWN command inputting from the ALS and ALARM PROCESSING circuit, the optical laserinside the O/E circuit activates/deactivates the Tx signal.

The transmit optical module handles the following alarms:

– Tx FAIL : failure inside the optical transmitter, set whenever the transmitted power level decreasesby 3dB;

– Tx DEGR: Laser degradation, set whenever the optical component bias current shows a 50%increased above the beginning–of–life value

Automatic Laser Switch–off function is handled by the ALS circuit as specified by CCITT Rec. G.958utilizing the following three optical protection algorithms:

Manual: LASER ON for 2 secs. everytime that push–button (6) is pressed

Manual for test: LASER ON for 90 secs. everytime that push–button (6) is pressed for more than 12 secs.

Automatic: LASER ON for 2 secs every 200 secs.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

116

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

The ALS circuit receives commands ARA and ARM to automatically and manually enable restart,respectively. Depending on the alarms detected on the unit, it also generates the SQUELCH_A andSHUTDOWN commands.

The units operates as a raceway for the 155 Mbit/s interconnection signals between the standard RRAunit and the radio side units.

These signals input the unit’s rear connector and can be accessed on the unit’s front cover plate (atconnectors (3) and (4)).

The unit and the DF unit interact to switch data, commands and alarms from/to the software managementsystem through the Q0IP interface.

The alarm indicating LED (5) on the unit’s front coverplate lights up to indicate unit malfunction.

A Remote Inventory circuit is provided to store unit inventory data (codes, series, date of construction).

Power sypply and Remote Invetory

The operating voltages input to the unit are the following:

+5.3 V ±3%–5.5 V ±3%

The PW ALM alarm is set in case of malfunctioning or whenever any operating voltage fails.

The electrical and chassis grounds are interconnected by a tin–drop strap.

The unit comprises a (64 x 16 bits) serial protocol EEPROM to store the inventory data, including partnumber, serial number, and manufacturing date of the unit.

This memory, completely isolated from the rest of the circuit, receives power from an auxiliary voltage andis linked to the Equipment Controller unit, which uses it to implement the Remote Invetory function.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

117

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

MANUAL LASER RESTORAL PUSHBUTTON

OUTGOING STM–1 STREAM (TOWARDS RADIO/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)3

4 INCOMING STM–1 STREAM (FROM RADIO/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)

5

6

TRANSMISSION OPTICAL CONNECTOR (STM–1)1

RECEPTION OPTICAL CONNECTOR (STM–1)2

Fig. 39. RRA O/E interface: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

118

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

3

MIT

&

CKDA

TA

SQ

UE

LCH

–A

SE

CT

ION

” A

”

TO/FROM RRA

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

ALA

RM

PR

OC

ES

SIN

G

ST

M–1

NR

Z

CM

IC

MI

155M

bit/s

STANDARD UNIT

MIR

–B

CKDA

TAS

EC

TIO

N ”

B ”

NR

Z

CM

IC

MI

155M

bit/s

155M

bit/s

O

E

O

E

MIR

–A TxD

EG

R

TxF

AIL

SH

UT

–DO

WN

ALS

ST

M–1

2

155M

bit/s 4

ST

M–1

155M

bit/s

ST

M–1

155M

bit/s

155M

bit/s

155M

bit/s

SQ

UE

LCH

–A

SH

UT

–DO

WN

AR

AA

RM

ALS

–ON

/OF

F

FS

L–O

FF

FS

L–O

N

MIR

–A

MIR

–B

MT

6

RE

SE

T

ELE

TR

ON

IC

FU

SE

1

+5.

3V

–5.5

V

PW

ALM

+5V

–5V

Q0I

P

INT

ER

FAC

E

ALS

–ON

FS

L–O

N (

For

cing

shu

tdow

n La

ser–

ON

)F

SL–

OF

F (

For

cing

shu

tdow

n La

ser–

OF

F)

AR

A (

Aut

omat

ic R

esta

rt E

nabl

e)A

RM

(M

anua

l Res

tart

Ena

ble)

ALS

–OF

F

TE

ST

–LE

D

Q0I

P B

US

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

MIR

–BM

IR–A MIT

GA

Fai

lure

PW

ALM

MT

(In

tern

al M

aste

r Ti

min

g F

ailu

re)

LAO

N (

Lase

r O

N)

RE

SE

TT

xDE

GR

TxF

AIL

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

FR

OM

/TO

1

PW

ALM

TE

ST

LE

D

GA

FA

ILU

RE

MT

GE

N A

LM

CM

I

CM

I

Fig. 40. RRA O/E interface: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

119

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.2 O/E substitutive unitSee Fig. 41. on page 120, Fig. 42. on page 121.

Scope of the O/E substitutive unit is to deliver the physical accesses for the main signal, on both user’sand radio sides. Moreover, it establishes connection towards the RRA standard 155 unit. Locally, it onlycarries out a transit function for the main signal.

In fact, connections are established as follows:

– Accesses (1) and (2), dedicated to the 155Mbit/s signals from/towards electrical protection/user forconnections from/towards the RRA standard unit.

– Accesses (3) and (4), dedicated to the 155Mbit/s signals from/towards electrical protection forconnections from/towards the RRA standard unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

120

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

INCOMING STM–1 STREAM (FROM USER/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)

OUTGOING STM–1 STREAM (TOWARDS USER/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)

OUTGOING STM–1 STREAM (TOWARDS RADIO/ELECTRICAL PROTEC-TION)

INCOMING STM–1 STREAM (FROM RADIO/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)

Fig. 41. O/E substitutive unit: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

121

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

FRO

M/T

OW

AR

DS

PRO

TE

CT

ION

/USE

R

FRO

M/T

OW

AR

DS

RR

A S

TAN

DA

RD

FRO

M/T

OW

AR

DS

PRO

TE

CT

ION

/RA

DIO

FRO

M/T

OW

AR

DS

RR

A S

TAN

DA

RD

Fig. 42. O/E substitutive unit: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

122

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.3 RRA standard 155See Fig. 43. on page 124, Fig. 44. on page 125.

The RRA standard 155 unit bidirectionally interfaces the STM–1 synchronous stream and houses the cardcontroller unit.

Its functional description is subdivided as follows:

– Transmit side W–E– Transmit side E–W– Card Controller– Q0IP interface/commands and alarms– Power supply and remote inventory

Transmit side W–E

The CMI input signal reaches the SPI block (Physical Interface) where G.703 interface operations areimplemented.

The 155Mbit/s serial signal is in turn converted into four 38.88Mbit/s streams. A 38.88MHz CK4 clocksignal is extracted. Loss of signal activates the LOSR W–E alarm.

Subsequently, the signals reach gate array ORAZIO which carries out the following functions:

– RST (Regenerator Section Termination) terminates the SOH (see Fig. 38. page 113)first three lines,extracting and inserting the relevant information (5.1 SOH interface E–W)

– checks the alignment word A1 and A2 If unaligned, LOS W–E and LOF W–E alarms are generated– Checks byte B1, to calculate the BIP8 parity– Extracts/inserts the DCCR streams on the line side and radio side– Extracts the 38MHz clock signal further used as synchronization reference– Assesses Performance Monitoring of the parity calculation on bytes B2 (the value of bytes B2 is not

recalculated)– Generates a COMPA signal reporting any phase difference between the written and read clock to

lock VCXO 155 used as master in the Tx section.

This block ensures transmission continuity of the signals, even if the main signal is lost. In that case, theCOMPA signal keeps the VCXO locked to the nominal frequency in order to reconstruct a STM–1 frame.

The new STM–1 frame will be made up of the AIS signal, in payload and in the MSOH section, while theRSOH section remains operational for insertion of services.

The parallel/serial block converts the 38.88Mbit/s signals forwarded by gate array ORAZIO into a serial155Mbit/s one. Moreover, it splits the 155MHz signal onto four paths before delivering it to gate arrayORAZIO.

The serial signal is connected to the SPI block where G.703 interfacing is completed. Loss of output signalactivates the MIT W–E alarm. The signal is in turn made available for connection towards the HSW unit.

Whenever PWfail, LOS WE, LOF WE, MIT WE (W–E direction) or PWfail, LOS EW, LOF EW and MIT EW(E–W direction) are detected, switching criteria on the line and radio side respectively are activated forthe AUX, EC and CRU units.

Transmit side E–W

As to the description of the transmit section E–W/radio side, refer to the previous paragraph dealing withthe line side. Characteristics are similar.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

123

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Card Controller

Main function of the card controller is to manage the DCCR streams.

Through the IECBN line, DCCR streams are swapped towards the EC unit which also receives informationpertaining to status, alarms and unit configurations through the IECBL line.

If the card controller unit fails, ALM CARD CO alarm is activated, causing the unit alarm LED (1) to turnON.

The unit can manage external DCCR streams in both line and radio directions.

Power supply and remote inventory

At the unit input, the power supply voltages are:

+5.3V ± 3%–5.5V ± 3%+12.1V ± 3%

PWALM alarm is generated whenever one of the voltages is defective or lost. The electrical andmechanical grounds are strap–interconnected.

The unit is also equipped with a E2PROM (64x16 bit/serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data suchas part number, serial number and manufacturing date.

E2PROM, completely isolated from the rest of the circuit, is power fed by a service voltage and connectedto the equipment controller unit that uses it to draw up the remote inventory.

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 11. RRA standard 155 presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

RRA standard 155

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

RRA standard 1553CY00405AAAA(487.230.076 C)

===>3CY00401AAAA(411.200.239 S)

Fig. 43. page 124 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

124

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

RRA 1

1

Fig. 43. RRA standard 155: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

125

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

SER

IAL

/PA

RA

LL

EL

EX

TR

AC

TIO

NC

LO

CK

FUSE

S

SER

IAL

PAR

AL

LE

L/

INT

ER

F.Q

0IP

SER

IAL

PAR

AL

LE

L/

SER

IAL

/PA

RA

LL

EL

EX

TR

AC

TIO

NC

LO

CK

CO

NT

RO

LL

ER

CA

RD

600

Fig. 44. RRA standard 155: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

126

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.4 Hitless switchSee to Fig. 45. on page 128 and Fig. 46. on page 129.

The Hitless Switch unit operates as a switch to implement the APS (Automatic Protection Switching)functions. This unit is made up of three sections carrying out the following functions: transmission, receipt,and alarm switching management/Q0IP.

Transmit section

The Hitless Switch unit receives on connector (4) the CMI signal at 155 Mbit/s.

A signal transition detector generate the MIR alarm. The input signal can be monitored on point (1).

A hybrid splits the signal onto two paths toward points (2) and (3) in the direction to the modem assembly.Two detectors drive the MIR Tx1 or MIR Tx2 in case of output signal failure.

Receive section

The unit receives two CMI–coded 155 Mbit/s signal from the modemodulators assembly through coaxialconnectors (5) (6).

The two received signals are fed to two cable equalizers, compensating any amplitude vs frequencydistortions of the cable up to 12 dB in ”f for path 0 and path 1 respectively.

The signals are then input to the CMI/NRZ conversion blocks, that the following functions are performed:

– CMI–to–NRZ code conversion– Clock signal extraction– Generation of the signal failure alarms (MIR 0 and MIR 1).

Two delay cells compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths followed by the two signals.The DLY A and DLY I commands coming from the Q0IP interface try selection of the delay time, either viaSOFTWARE or via HARDWARE (SZ).

Whenever the phase comparator detects a misalignment in the data input to the elastic store, BLOCK 1and BLOCK 2 commands are generated to suppress a number of leading edges of the read clock and tocreate, through an ”on/off switch”, appropriate ”holes” to restore alignment between the two paths.

Whenever both paths are aligned, the phase comparator generates the OK command, indicating that aswitching operation, if any, will be performed error–free. The alignment strategy implemented by thecomparator is a byte–by–byte one. The DELTA PHASE signal indicates the alignment or misalignmentstatus between the two channels (see the System Handbook for the voltage values).

The elastic stores dynamically recover ±8 bits for each path. The data signals, as well as the clock signals,output from the elastic stores are input to the switch.

The KR command coming from the logic drives SW1 and SW2 switches that switch the selected channeland its respective timing signal. Subsequently, the four 38.88 Mbit/s NRZ signals selected by the switchare converted into one 155 Mbit/s stream by using a clock signal provided by a 155 MHz VCO, in turnlocked–in to the COMPA signal.

The 155 Mbit/s NRZ + clock signal is converted into the CMI format for its transmission on line; in addition,the MIT Rx alarm is set whenever the signal fails.

The CMI signal can be monitored on point (2) located on the front of the unit. The CMI signal is split byan inductive hybrid and is output towards the Aggregate unit through connector (7).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

127

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Alarm/Q0IP switching management

The logic block manages the manual and remote alarm information and the forcing commands comingfrom the Q0IP interface in order to generate the KR and KRSA commands.

The KR command, which drives the channel hitless switch, is generated in the following circumstances:

Priority 1: Manual switching controlled by switches (8) located on the front of the unit.

Priority 2: Forced switching resulting from a remote forcing received through the Q0IP interface (PCD/PC).

Priority 3: Automatic switching controlled by switching request commands coming from the SPL unit.

The logic drives general unit alarm (13).

Front–mounted switch (8) make it possible to control manual switchings and its respective local HSWcommand is sent to the logic in the presence of this situation.

Led (9) displays a manual operation in progress. Finally, a summary alarm indication (12) displays ageneric loss of the signal. The switch settings are identified by LEDs (10), (11).

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 12. 1+1/R hitless switch presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

1+1 Hitless Switch

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

1+1/R hitless switch3CY04283AAAA(483.200.095 F)

===>3CY04282AAAA(411.200.376 T)

Fig. 45. page 128 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

128

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

10 CHANNEL 0 OPERATING STATUS (GREEN LED)

11

12 LOS ALARM (RED LED)

13

01

MAN

SW

CHANNEL 1 OPERATING STATUS (GREEN LED)

HLSW

0

CMI

1RX

0

CMI1

TX

8 HITLESS SWITCH MANUAL/AUTOMATIC SWITCH

9 MANUAL OPERATION INDICATION (YELLOW LED)

2

1 TEST POINT OF CMI SIGNAL TO MODULATOR

7

6

5 CMI SIGNAL FROM DEM. 1

2 CMI SIGNAL TO MOD.1

3

4 CMI SIGNAL FROM AGGREGATE UNIT

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

CMI SIGNAL TO MOD.0

CMI SIGNAL FROM DEM. 0

CMI SIGNAL TO AGGREGATE UNIT

TEST POINT OF CMI SIGNAL TO AGGREGATE

Fig. 45. Hitless switch: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

129

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

TO

MO

DU

LA

TO

RS

FRO

M

AL

AR

MS/

PHA

SEST

AT

US

INT

ER

FAC

E

PHA

SEC

OM

PAR

AT

OR

16 B

itE

LA

STIC

STO

RE

16 B

itE

LA

STIC

STO

RE

155

MH

zV

CO

FRO

M

AG

GR

EG

AT

E

TO

AG

GR

EG

AT

E

Q0I

P

Q0I

P

13

23 6 5

12

98

1011

74

DE

MO

DU

LA

TO

RS

Fig. 46. Hitless switch: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

130

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.5 SPL (Switching and Power Logic)See Fig. 47. on page 135, Fig. 48. on page 136.

The Switching and Power Logic (SPL) unit carries out the following functions:

– processes the switching criteria to generate switching commands– generates the ATPC commands– backs–up the system presettings and management interfaces.

Hitless switching management

Hitless switching is managed by the KR 1+1 command generated according to the criteria listed below.KR OUT command determines switching position.

Hitless switching is managed in a RESTORAL or NON RESTORAL mode, through the Forcing Driver(D.F.) unit presettings.

Switching criteria:

EWL – Early Warning Low: stands for a bit error rate (BER) ranging from 10E–6 to 10E–9. That condi-tion implies that the received signal is likely to be error free, but switching might prevent its furtherdegradation. EWL is generated either by the local receiver/demodulator or by the remote ones whichretransmit it. EWL is also activated by the IF early warning criterion.

EWH – Early Warning High: the received signal is defective (BER ranges from 10E–3 to 10E–6), butthe information contents are still acceptable. EWH is generated either by the local demodulator orby the remote ones which retransmit it.

HBER – High BER: the signal is totally defective. (BER > 10E–3). EWH is generated either by thelocal demodulator or by the remote ones which retransmit it.

A_DEM: failure criterion gathering demodulator alarms, loss of frame (FAT) alarm, and upstream re-mote failure criterion (generated by the demodulator).

MIR_HWSRX: loss of pulses at the Rx section input of the hitless switch.

One of the SPL functions is to establish the channels priority by analyzing the switching criteria listed aboveand the hitless switching simulations forwarded by the D.F. through serial dialogue. Priority of the twochannels depends on the alarms severity encountered as listed below:

0 – efficient channel : no active criterion on the channel or efficiently simulated by D.F.

2 – early warning low : only the early warning low criterion is active on the channel or EWLis simulated by D.F.

4 – early warning high : the early warning high criterion is active on the channel or EWH issimulated by D.F.

6 – HBER : the high bit error rate criterion is active on the channel or HBER issimulated by D.F.

8 – defective : the TEGU criterion is active on the channel or is simulated by D.F.

The OK_Rx signal forwarded by the hitless switch unit is used for hitless switching operations. Switchingis hitless for all real or simulated criteria, expect for the defective one.

Switching time must not exceed 0.5 msec, provided the two channels are aligned.

For the HBER alarm, another 0.5 msec can elapse to get the channels aligned, after which switching takesplace in any event.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

131

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

For the EWH alarm, the alloted time is 20 msec.

In the 1+1 configurations, the information stream travels in parallel on two separate channels (Main andStandby) and is therefore permanently split on the transmit side. On the receive side, the SPL unit extractsthe least degraded channel with the KR1+1 command.

When NON–RESTORAL operated, the least degraded channel is selected.

When RESTORAL operated, if the severity of alarms is identical, the main channel is selected. The returnposition of the hitless switch is used to determine whether the switch has been forced or not. If the switchingoperation fails, the SPL unit sends an alarm to the D.F. which is able to determine whether it had previouslyforced the switch or whether the switch is alarmed.

HST Tx switching and electrical switching management (for RRA protection)

RRA switching is managed by the K–RRA command that switches over either the electrical switch or thehitless switch unit (Tx section).

KRRA–OUT command forwarded by the hitless switch unit determines switching position.

Switching is managed in a RESTORAL or NON RESTORAL mode, through the Forcing Driver unitpresettings.

Switching criteria:

The K_RRA command is generated by processing the following criteria:

– FAIL_RRA LI: RRA failure alarm (line side)– FAIL_RRA RA: RRA failure alarm (radio side)– MIR: from the hitless switch unit (Tx section)– MIR: from the electrical switch unit (Rx section).

A major failure in both RRAs causes the SPL controller to generate the RRA_CRASH command to inhibitthe alarms downstream.

Hot standby switching management

Hot standby switching is managed by the Tx1–select and Tx2–select commands according to the criterialisted below.

POS–SW command forwarded by the hot standby logic unit determines switching position.

Switching is managed in a RESTORAL or NON RESTORAL mode.

– A_TX– A_MOD

In the systems using a post–amplifier booster, switching is RESTORAL on the presettable channel, thebooster alarm merging with A_TX to form a further switching root. The D.F. determines switching position.

ATPC function

The Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) function can be summarized as follows:

– D/A converts the MIR PRx voltages forwarded by the receivers, subsequently encoded for the ATPCmessage towards remote; inserted into the 3.2. byte.

– Receives the remote ATPC messages from the 64 kbit/s stream (3.2 byte), processes and activatesthe K–ATPC commands required to adjust the transmitted power.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

132

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

– Dialogues with the controller unit to receive and execute the software Tx power increase commands,as well as presettings and manual operations from the Forcing Driver. Statuses and alarms relevantto the unit operating conditions are also transmitted.

ATPC function

The SPL unit receives the AGC analog voltages from the receivers, in turn applied to the 8–bit D/Aconverter with multiplexed inputs. The microcontroller drives the D/A converter to select the AGC voltageto be converted, to activate the conversion process and to read the conversion results.

Each AGC voltage is sampled and converted befored being compared to two threshold values, spacedappr. 2dB apart and corresponding to field values in which the control loop operates. The range betweenthe two thresholds represents an holding range. Under regular propagation conditions, the Rx fieldexceeds the highest threshold, causing the DOWN command to be transmitted downwards to keep thetransmitted power down to the minimum value (nominal).

Under fading conditions, the Rx field decreases. When exceeding the lowest threshold, the loop controlsthe transmitted power level and sends an UP command upwards to increase it. When the Rx field valueis comprised between the two thresholds, a HOLD command is forwarded to keep the transmitted powerlevel constant.

Eventually, when the Rx field rises to exceed the highest threshold, a DOWN command is sent to decreasethe transmitted power level. If a transmitter is alarmed, the local SPL sends DOWN commands to bringit down to the minimum power level, avoiding thus possible interferences on the cross–polarized channelin the systems with frequency reuse.

XPIC inhibition management

Generally speaking, detection of an alarm on a transmitter in the systems with frequency reuse (e.g.) theone allocated to horizontal polarization) causes the vertical XPIC circuit to be inhibited. i.e. thedemodulator circuit of the channel allocated to cross polarization compared to the one associated to thealarmed transmitter.

In order to avoid further interferences, the SPL that drives the alarmed transmitter will provide it withDOWN commands. Structure of the messages swapped between the two SPL units includes the XPICdata for each transmitter. The XPIC inhibition management will be inserted in a new release of the SPLproduct.

Presettings backup and interfaces management

The local D.F. receives from the operator’s interface a serie of system presettings and operations,EEPROM–stored, to restore the system operating conditions in case of power supply failure or of any otheranomalies.

The D.F. also forwards these parameters to the SPL, unit which backs up the information on a similarEEPROM memory. If the Radio Card Controller EEPROM fails or if D.F. needs to be replaced formaintenance operations, SPL can restitute the data.

Furthermore, in the D.F. fails or is prevented from communicating, the SPL controller extracts from theEEPROM stored data the information required for its operation.

Whenever a failure is detected on D.F., all commands previously sent by the Radio Card Controller aredisabled; on the other hand, presettings stored by the SPL in its EEPROM remain valid.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

133

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

SPL can acquire the current system configuration from three different sources:

– D.F., through serial dialogue– reading of the dip–switches present in the SPL pcb– scanning the contents of the SPL EEPROM

Upon restarting the SPL microcontroller, an attempt is made to re–establish communication with the D.F.;If successful, D.F. sends SPL a first group of configuration messages and SPL ignores the configurationpreviously stored in its EEPROM.

Three types of configuration–related information come from D.F.:

– static configuration: stored in the D.F.’s EEPROM and usually corresponds to the one stored bythe SPL’s EEPROM. Through a software configuration, the operator can modify the staticconfiguration. However, the latter is usually set when the system is initially turned ON and can notbe altered unless a new definition of the system itself is considered. If the SPL EEPROM–memorizedstatic configuration differs from the one received from D.F., SPL updates its own EEPROM data.

– dynamic configuration: manages temporary conditions encountered during operation. Sincetemporary, they are stored in a RAM memory instead of EEPROM.

– EEPROM test, made by calculating a checksum and checking its respective value.

If the EEPROM test fails, SPL outputs a signalling message to D.F. through serial dialogue. Other casesof failure cause SPL to disable its own functions and to perform a self–test. By doing so, the general modulealarm LED (1) turns on and the HDL connection to D.F. drops.

LED (1) is ON in case of a unit failure hardware (through the watchdog circuitry) or software (through aself–test procedure) detected. It is also ON upon resetting the microprocessor, before completing thesoftware self–initialization.

Watchdog operations

Two watchdog operations are considered:

– software protection timeout (failed retriggering)– power supply voltage control circuit.

In both cases, the watchdog condition is automatically recovered (hardware). In fact, in the first case,intervention of the watchdog resets the microprocessor, i.e. restarts the software. In the second case, themicroprocessor is kept on reset while the correct values of the power supply voltages are being recovered.

Product interfaces and data

The SPL product communicates with the following interfaces:

– Serial interfaces– Parallel I/O alarm interface– AGC analog voltage interface.

These interfaces feature the following characteristics.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

134

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Serial interfaces

Through a Q0IP/HDLC serial interface, the product communicates with the Forcing Driver; through apseudo–HDLC interface, it sets up dialogue with the remote SPL or ATPC.

To physically implement such interfaces, the serial ones available inside the microprocessor are used asfollows:

– programmable interface to be ”pseudo–HDLC” operated for dialogue with the remote unit throughbyte 3.2

– programmable interface to be HDLC operated (slave)for dialogue with D.F. (Master) through aQ0IP/HDLC interface.

Parallel I/O alarms interface

The available CEPT inputs use a PNP transistor type, open–collector, with a ground emitter interface.

AGC analog voltages interfaces

Receive and convert the PR0 and PR1 signals into digital. They are transferred to the controller unitthrough the HDLC interfaced 64 kbit/s channel to check the Rx power level. Also used to encode the ATPCsignals to be transmitted in the ATPC stream.

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 13. SPL/R presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

SPL /R (HW SW)

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

SPL/R (HW)3CY04276AAAA(487.230.171 G)

===>3CY04277AAAA(411.200.374 Z)

Fig. 47. page 135 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

135

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

Fig. 47. SPL: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

136

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

MIC

RO

PRO

CE

SSO

R

FRO

M/T

OW

AR

DS

RC

C

CO

NT

RA

D.

V11

AN

AL

OG

INT

64kb

it/s

”Tx”

AT

PC C

HA

NN

EL

64kb

it/s

”Tx”

AT

PC C

HA

NN

EL

64kb

it/s

CE

PTIN

T

CM

OS

INT

CO

NT

RA

D.

V11

CO

NT

RA

D.

V11

CE

PTIN

T

CM

OS

INT

CE

PTIN

T

CM

OS

INT

Fig. 48. SPL: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

137

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

See to Fig. 49. on page 138 and Fig. 50. on page 139.

The unit receives a CMI–coded G.703 155 Mbit/s signal on its Tx section, point (1), and splits it onto outputs(2) and (3) through an inductive hybrid.

In the Rx section, the unit receives two 155 Mbit/s signals at points (4) and (5) respectively and twodetector circuits detect the MIR 0 and MIR 1 alarms, if any.

Subsequently, the signals are fed to a switch, where one of the two signals is selected according to thevalue for the K–RSA command coming from the SPL unit. The selected signal is output on connector (6).The unit also outputs the MIR 0 and MIR 1 signals for their interconnection towards the SPL unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

138

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

(STM–1 155 Mbit/s)

DATA OUTPUT TO RSA 0

DATA OUTPUT TO RSA 1

SWITCHING INPUT FROM RSA 0

SWITCHING INPUT FROM RSA 1

DATA OUTPUT TO USER

RXOUT

TXIN

DATA INPUT FROM USER(STM–1 155 Mbit/s)

TX0

TX1

RX0

RX1

Fig. 49. 1+1 Electrical switch: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

139

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Fig. 50. Electrical switch: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

140

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.7 3+1/4+1 Tx protection switchSee Fig. 51. on page 141 and Fig. 52. on page 142.

The Tx protection switch unit receives the CMI–encoded 155 Mbit/s signals on points (1), (2), (3), and (4).Loss of signals generates MIR alarms for each channel.

The input signal detector circuits on point (1) can detect either MIR 1 or MIR 4 alarms depending on theunit having been inserted into the main or extension subrack. MIR alarms are similarly detected for all otherchannels whenever the main signal is lost.

In the main configuration (max. 3+1), point (4) is used as the input for the occasional channel whereas inthe extension configuration, it inputs channel 7. The same alternative applies to all other incomingchannels.

The 155 Mbit/s signals are output on points (5), (6), (7), (8), and (9) to be connected towards theTRIB/AGGR units. Note that the signal on point (9) is only available in the extension configuration.

Loss of signal on one of the inputs causes the corresponding MIR alarms to be forwarded to the forcingdriver 155 unit. The latter also delivers K–type signals to manage the protection functions.

The main signals are accessed through connectors on the unit front cover; alarms and commands areinterlinked on the backplane.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

141

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

CH1/CH4 INPUT

CH2/CH5 INPUT

CH3/CH6 INPUT

CH7/OCCASIONAL INPUT

CH1/CH4 OUTPUT

CH2/CH5 OUTPUT

CH3/CH6 OUTPUT

CH7 OUTPUT(USED IN EXPANSION)

OCCASIONAL OUTPUT/SPARE

THE UNIT IS USED BOTH IN THE 3+1 BASE CONFIGU-RATION AND EXPANSION, RESPECTIVELY FOR CHANNELS

Fig. 51. Tx electrical switch (3+1, 4+1): operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

142

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

155M

bit/s

CM

I

MIR

1/M

IR 4

K1

1

K5

5 6

K7

2

K2

MIR

2/M

IR 5

7

MIR

OC

C/M

IR 7

K4

4K

6

3

K3

MIR

3/M

IR 6

8 9

155M

bit/s

CM

I

MIR

1/M

IR 7

MIR

2/M

IR 5

MIR

3/M

IR 6

MIR

OC

C/M

IR 7

K1

K2

K4

K3

K5

K7

K6

Fig. 52. Tx Protection Switch (3+1, 4+1): block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

143

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.8 3+1/4+1 Rx protection switchSee Fig. 53. on page 144 and Fig. 54. on page 145.

The Rx protection switch unit receives the CMI–encoded 155 Mbit/s signals on points (1), (2), (3), (4), and(5). Loss of signals generates MIR alarms for each channel.

The input signal detector circuits on point (1) can detect either MIR 1 or MIR 4 alarms depending on theunit having been inserted into the main or extension subrack. MIR alarms are similarly detected for all otherchannels whenever the main signal is lost.

In the main configuration (max. 3+1), point (5) is used as an input for the occasional channel whereas, inthe extension configuration, it inputs the standby one. The signal on point (4) is used if channel 7 is to beextended. The same alternative applies to all other incoming channels.

The 155 Mbit/s signals are output on points (6), (7), (8), and (9) to be connected towards the TRIB/AGGRunits. The signal on point (9) delivers the occasional channel when operating in the main configuration orchannel 7 when operating in the extension one.

Loss of signal at one of the inputs causes the corresponding MIR alarms to be forwarded to the forcingdriver 155 unit. The latter also delivers K–type signals to manage the protection functions.

The main signals are accessed through connectors on the unit front cover; alarms and commands areinterlinked on the backplane.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

144

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

CH1/CH4 INPUT

CH2/CH5 INPUT

CH3/CH6 INPUT

CH1/CH4 OUTPUT

CH2/CH5 OUTPUT

CH7/OCCASIONAL OUTPUT

CH7 INPUT(USED IN EXPANSION)

OCCASIONAL INPUT/SPARE

CH3/CH6 OUTPUT

Fig. 53. Rx electrical switch (3+1, 4+1): operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

145

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

155M

bit/s

CM

I

MIR

1/M

IR 4

1K

16 7

2

MIR

2/M

IR 5

155M

bit/s

CM

I

MIR

1/M

IR 4

MIR

2/M

IR 5

MIR

3/M

IR 6

MIR

7

K1

K2

K4

K3

K5

K7

K6

MIR

SP

AR

E

K0

K2

K0

498

K3

3

MIR

3/M

IR 6

MIR

7

MIR

STA

ND

BY

5

K5

K6

K7

Fig. 54. Rx Protection Switch (3+1, 4+1): block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

146

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.9 RRAUX party–lineSee Fig. 55. on page 149, Fig. 56. on page 150.

The RRAUX party–line unit manages some 64kbit/s streams in the RSOH section of the STM–1 frame.These streams, inserted/extracted by the RRA units into/from the STM–1 frame are AUX–managed insidethe following interfaces:

– 5.1Mbit/s SOH towards RRA– 5.1Mbit/s SOH from RRA

The unit outputs the following signals to use these bytes:

– a max. of six data channels, out of which three are 64 kbit/s codirectional G.703 and three are V11interfaced (V11 as per CCITT Rec. equivalent to RS422 A)

– a service order–wire offering the following telephone services: selective call, local operator’s position(POL), party line.

SERVICE ORDER–WIRE

For the order–wire, connection between any two users is supported by:

– green LED (1), indicating free line;– yellow LED (2), indicating busy line (ON steady); an incoming selective call (blinking);– yellow LED (3), indicating an incoming conference call;– J–key (4), engaging the line;– R–key (5), resetting the line;– Socket (6), inserting the handset.

The user, having checked that the line is free, inserts the keyboard pad into socket (6), presses T–key (4)to engage the line and dials the user’s number with whom he wishes to set up a connection.

Connection between any two users is established by the calling party who dials the identification numberof the required party. The identification number is made up of two digits (from 01 to 99) and isDTMF–encoded.

The called party identifies the incoming call both visually (yellow LED (2) or (3) turning ON), andacoustically (buzzer). A conversation can start as soon as the called party lifts the handset. This operationinhibits both LED and buzzer. A conversation in progress is confidential; as a matter of fact, any other userslifting the handset will get a busy tone.

A third party can cut–in on a call by pressing T–key (4). A cut–in tone is then received by the two otherparties. Any users can also make conference calls. In this case, all the other users receive the call andare enabled to listening only; they can cut–in on the conversation by pressing T–key (4).

A call ends whenever the calling or called party hangs up, thus releasing the line. If the line is still engaged,it’s because both parties left the handset off the hook. Enter a reset command, i.e. press R–key (5) torelease the line.

The party line section links the selective call and the local operator’s position (POL) circuits to the COMBOone to encode the speech channel. At that stage, the signals are swapped with the AUX and MATASSAgate arrays.

DATA CHANNELS

The 64 kbit/s and V11 data channels transit through the relevant interface circuits, to be subsequently andsequentially connected to gate arrays AUX and MATASSA.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

147

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

GATE ARRAY AUX

Task of the gate array AUX is to multiplex and demultiplex the local overheads to/from gate arrayMATASSA (multiplexing/demultiplexing blocks) and to order them as required by the latter.

It can transmit the requested bytes at the selected bit rate (64 kbit/s) either codirectionally orcontradirectionally and with the proper interfaces (G.703, V11, or COMBO).

GATE ARRAY MATASSA

Function of gate array MATASSA is to interface the RRAUX party line unit to the RRA units. As a matterof fact, this gate array processes the 5.2 Mbit/s frames connected to the RRA units. The gate array canbe regarded as a component that performs a split between three bidirectional gates:

– RRA L– RRA R– Local (data and voice ports).

The last function is implemented by appropriate matrixes.

Because all incoming signals must be synchronized before being processed by the local clock, it has beennecessary to use a 5.184 MMHz PLL in order to synchronize the local clock to the incoming 38.88 MHzone. Eventually, gate array MATASSA interfaces gate array AUX, as master, complete with its sync. andclock signals.

Bytes A1, A2, B1, and B2, the AU pointer and the MSOH section are not handled by this unit. Thanks tothe cross connection feature, all bytes possibly terminated can be adressed, starting from the incomingframe, to the outgoing one. Refer to the operator’s handbook for the selection operations (ECT).

Futurebus driver

The futurebus driver block is nothing else but an electrical interface, whose purpose is to improve thespeed and integrity of the data handled by gate array MATASSA with the OH–BUS.

Card Controller

The card controller subunit carries out the following functions:

Dialogue with the equipment controller unit

Through LIECB and NIECB connections, information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms, etc... areswapped with the equipment controller unit.

Physical position acknowledgment

Through ID 0–4 signals, the card controller acknowledges physical position of the unit inside the subrack.

Main unit acknowledgment

Through CYPTE signals, the card controller acknowledges onto which unit it has been mounted.

Local dialogue for alarms, configurations and performance

Such a dialogue allows to transmit/receive to/from the unit E2PROM– memorized software presettings.OH bytes and matrixes to route the SOH bytes towards the RRA units are defined. To proceed, ISW alarmsignals forwarded by the very RRA units are processed by the interface.

Unit alarms and performance are collected. Local alarms turn ON red LED (1).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

148

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Power supply and remote inventory

At the unit input, the power supply voltages are:

+5.3V ± 3%–5.5V ± 3%+12.1V ± 3%

PWALM alarm is generated whenever one of the voltages is defective or lost. The electrical andmechanical grounds are strap–interconnected.

The unit is also equipped with a EEPROM to store the unit inventory data such as part number, serialnumber and manufacturing date.

EEPROM, completely isolated from the rest of the circuit, is power fed by a service voltage and connectedto the equipment controller unit that uses it to draw up the remote inventory.

CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is connected to the equipmentcontroller unit.

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 14. RRAUX party line presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

RRA AUX party line

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

RRAUX/EOW party line3CY02516AAAA(483.200.079 W)

===>3CY02515AAAA(411.200.255 S)

Fig. 55. page 149 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

149

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

LINE FREE (GREEN LED)

LINE BUSY = STEADILY ONRECEIVE = BLINKING (YELLOW LED)

IN CONFERENCE CALL SIGNALLING (YELLOW LED)

LINE ENGAGED KEY

LINE RESET KEY

MICROTELEPHONE INSERTION POINT

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

Fig. 55. RRAUX party line: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

150

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

INT

ER

FAC

EG

.703

Tx

INT

ER

FAC

EV

11

Tx

INT

ER

FAC

EG

.703

Rx

INT

ER

FAC

EV

11

Rx

BY

TE

SOH

MA

TR

IX

BY

TE

SOH

MA

TR

IXGE

NE

RA

TIO

NT

IME

S

FRO

M/

TO

WA

RD

SR

RA

UN

USE

D

OPE

RA

TO

R’S

LO

CA

L

SET

EX

TE

NSI

ON

PAR

TY

LIN

E

CA

LL

SEL

EC

TIV

EL

INE

CH

EC

K

STA

TU

S

EQ

UIP

.T

O

CO

NT

RO

LL

ER

FUSE

EL

EC

TR

ON

IC

FRO

M R

RA

FRO

M R

RA

AC

KN

OW

LE

DG

ME

NT

MO

TH

ER

UN

ITE

QU

IPM

EN

TD

IAL

OG

UE

WIT

H

CO

NT

RO

LL

ER

UN

ITSE

LE

CT

ION

CR

U

AL

AR

MS,

CO

NFI

GU

RA

TIO

N,

LO

CA

L D

IAL

OG

UE

FO

R

PER

FOR

MA

NC

EA

CK

NO

WL

ED

GM

EN

T

PHIS

ICA

L P

OSI

TIO

N

Fig. 56. RRAUX party–line: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

151

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.10 Forcing driver 155See Fig. 57. on page 154, Fig. 58. on page 155.

This unit generates switching commands sent to the units protecting the RRA units and the clockdistribution.

Basically, depending on the requirements, this unit decides which of the three main channels can occupythe standby and whether the standby can be used by an occasional channel.

Switching commands COMSW 0–3 and COMSW 0–1 are supplied by a commands generator accordingto indications forwarded by the switching criteria processing block, which is that part of the unit monitoringall switching request signals present at its input on the basis of preestablished priorities. More precisely:

– CSWR 0–3 designate the alarms of the RRA units housed in the assembly, providing the forcingdriver with information on the unit failure, while CSWC 0 to 1designate the CRU units alarms.

– C FORZ SW: indicate that a sotware forcing was carried out through the equipment controller– OP MAN: indicates that a local operator shifted selector switch (2) on the front cover to MAN

(manual), selecting thus with switch (1) the channel to be sent to standby. In that case, LED (5) isusually ON.

The preset priority is:

– manual forcing: priority 1– software forcing: priority 2– unit alarms: priority 3

In case of simultaneous activation of alarms on different channels, channel 1 has priority over channel 2and channel 2 over channel 3. However, a standby already occupied by one of the channels is not releasedby a higher priority alarm arising on another channel.

Green LEDs (3) on the unit front cover give a visual indication related to the channel occupying the standby.

As already mentioned, on the basis of switching criteria processing, the commands generator suppliesselected command COM SW to the Tx/Rx protection switch units.

This operation is slaved to INCO 0–3 signals supplied by the coherence checking block. This blockcompares coherence between the outgoing switching commands and the ECO signals (switchingposition) received from the Tx/Rx protection switch units.

Signals are coherent when the switching circuits of the protection units are in the position indicated byCOM SW commands.

Signals are incoherent when ECO signals and the commands unmatch (typically when a switching requestis still pending).

In coherent conditions, INCO 0–3 signals are missing and the output commands are frozen. In incoherentconditions, they enable the generator to reconfirm the switching commands in the attempt to reachcoherence and turn ON unit alarm LED (6).

If the standby (occasional) channel is already occupied by one of the others, a RRA alarm (CSWR 1–3)produces inhibition command INIG 1–3. This command is forwarded to the switching logic inside theswitching and services assembly.

INIG command is supplied by the inhibitions generator to prevent the standby from being unecessarilyoccupied to protect a channel that would be lost anyway.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

152

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

COM SWO command is used to inhibit forwarding of AIS by RRA 0 whenever the occasional channel isemployed as standby to protect one of the other radio channels.

LED (6) on the front cover does not only turn ON in case of incoherence between the switching commandsand ECO signals, but also when a unit is defective, when a power supply PWALM alarm is detected orwhen the card controller reports a failure.

Card Controller

The card controller subunit carries out the following functions:

Main unit acknowledgment

Through CTYPE signals, the card controller acknowledges onto which unit it has been mounted.

Physical position acknowledgment

Through ID 0–4 signals, the card controller acknowledges physical position of the unit inside the subrack.

Dialogue with the ESCT equipment controller

Through LIECB and NIECB connections, information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms, etc... isswapped with the ESCT equipment controller unit.

The 192kbit/s DCCRS signal can be swapped with the switching and services assembly through a V11interface.

Alarms control

In connection with the card controller operating conditions, an alarm is generated, causing the unit alarmLED to turn ON.

Power supply, Remote inventory

At the unit input, the power supply voltages are:

+5.3V ± 3%–5.5V ± 3%+12.1V ± 3%

PWALM alarm is activated whenever one of the voltages is defective or lost.

The unit is also equipped with a E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data such as code,serie, date of construction.

E2PROM, completely isolated from the rest of the circuit, is power fed by a service voltage and connectedto the ESCT equipment controller unit that uses it to draw up the remote inventory.

CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is directly conected towards theESCT equipment controller unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

153

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 15. Forcing Driver presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

HW155 Forcing Driver

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

HW155 Forcing Driver3CY01303AAAA(483.200.073 Q)

===>3CY04943AAAA(411.200.392 L)

Fig. 57. page 154 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

154

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

MANUAL SELECTION SWITCH

MANUAL/AUTOMATIC PRESETTINGS(AUTOMATIC : CENTRAL POSITION)

UNIT RESET PUSHBUTTON

INDICATES SELECTED CHANNEL (GREEN LED)

MANUAL OPERATION IN PROGRESS (YELLOW LED)

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

Fig. 57. Forcing driver 155: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

155

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RR

A A

ND

CR

U

AL

AR

MS

FRO

MPR

OC

ESS

ING

SWIT

CH

ING

CR

ITE

RIA

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

SWIT

CH

ING

CO

MM

AN

DS

CO

NT

RO

LL

ER

CH

EC

K

CO

HE

RE

NC

E

FUSE

EL

EC

TR

ON

IC

INH

IBIT

ION

SA

IS

DR

IVE

R U

NIT

CL

OC

K E

XT

ER

NA

L

GE

NE

RA

TO

RIN

HIB

ITIO

NS

SER

VIC

ES

ASS

EM

BLY

SWIT

CH

ING

AN

D

UN

ITSW

ITC

HIN

G

FUN

CT

ION

AL

UN

IT

CH

EC

K

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

DIA

LO

GU

E W

ITH

ESC

T

CO

NT

RO

LL

ER

CO

NT

RO

LA

LA

RM

SPO

SIT

ION

PHIS

ICA

L

AC

KN

OW

LE

DG

M.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTMAIN UNIT

Fig. 58. Forcing driver 155: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

156

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.11 Equipment Controller SMEC 2ASee Fig. 59. on page 160, Fig. 60. on page 161.

The equipment controller unit manages through appropriate interfaces:

– dialogue between the units housed in the assembly to collect alarms, monitor performance andsend/control software presettings (S interface).

– equipment alarm interfaces (A interface) towards:

• front cover LED• remote alarms• alarms towards the rack lamps• parallel contact from/to external equipment

As well as interfaces for:

• checks on unit type/presence• protections management• AND OR management• power supply alarms management• remote inventory

– local dialogue with a personal computer (ECT) (F interface)– dialogue with external equipment (mediation device) for network management operations (Q2

interface).– dialogue with an operative system for network management operations (Q3 interface).

The interfaces together with their corresponding functions are managed by:

– microprocessor– BUS control logic– Memories

S interface

As stated above, this interface manages the dialogue between the equipment controller and the cardcontroller subunits inside the assembly units. Dialogue is established for alarms gathering, performancemonitoring and presettings software configuration operations.

S interface consists of two serial buses, defined as INTRA EQUIPMENT CONTROL BUS (IECB):

LIECB, CKL : swaps messages for information streams inherent to the internal operations ofthe equipment.

NIECB, CKN : swaps messages for information streams dedicated to TMN (Transmission Man-agement Network), needing to access the auxiliary channels of the SDH frame.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

157

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

A interface

A interface activates the equipment alarm signals (i.e. parallel contacts, remote alarms, LEDs) byprocessing the unit alarm signals.

In addition, it also performs processing and switching operations.

The following remote alarms are sent to the relevant terminal tagblock:

– R, indicates OR’ing of all equipment alarms– URG, indicates an urgent alarm– NURG, indicates a non urgent alarm– TORC, indicates failure or loss of one of the two power supply units. It is the OR’ing of PFAIL 1/2– TANC, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) failure of both power supply units– TUP, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) that the equipment controller is alarmed– IND, displays an indicative alarm– LOS Q2, indicates no connection with the TMN– EXT, indicates an external alarm– INT, indicates an internal alarm– SWT, indicates that switching took place

The following alarms activate the rack LEDs.

– RURG, indicates an urgent alarm and turns ON the relative rack red LED– RNURG, indicates a non urgent alarm and turns ON the relative rack red LED– M, indicates storing status of the RURG+RNURG alarms and turns ON the rack yellow LED and

ATTD yellow LED (7) on the front cover.– C is the alarms storing command, activated by pressing pushbutton (2) on the unit front cover.

Command C is also sent to the AND OR subunit, together with:

– CAND, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) failure of all power supply units– UP, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) that the equipment controller is alarmed

The EUA contact informs the AND OR subunit on the presence or absence of the unit involved.

The ”LED Management” circuit activates the unit LEDs:

– red LED (5) URG, indicates an urgent alarm or when red LED (10) is also ON, activation of the unitreset

– red LED (6) NURG, indicates a non urgent alarm– yellow LED (8) ABN, indicates an anomalous condition– yellow LED (9) IND, displays an indicative alarm– red LED (10) INT, indicates an internal unit alarm or when red LED (5) is ON too, activation of the

unit reset– ATTD yellow LED (7), indicates storing status of URG+ NURG alarms after having pressed

pushbutton (2) on the unit front cover.

By pressing pushbutton (1) on the unit front cover (LAMPTEST), the operator tests the efficiency of allLEDs without having to simulate alarm generation.

The ”Parallel Contacts Management” circuit delivers to an external equipment three alarm contacts (CPO1–3 configured). The circuit also receives (still from external equipment) eight CPI 1–8 contacts which canbe used as required.

A interface also manages the AND OR/2 subunit, receiving the alarms:

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

158

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

PW AND OR indicates failure or loss of AND OR/2

OR ALIMI (battery OR from the AND OR/2), indicates failure or loss of one of the two stationbatteries

The power supply units are managed through the PFAIL 1–2 alarms.

A interface analyzes the unit conditions to manage the protection circuits through switching inside theassembly.

The operating clock reference unit is selected by processing the OSWCA/B signals which report theoperating status of the two units, and by generating the SWCKMN selection command.

The ”Unit Presence” circuit checks the presence/absence of the units with CAREM commands.

Another function of the A interface is to transmit/receive the units and assembly remote inventory data.

Q2 interface (available when the I/O extension unit is not equipped)

Q2 interface allows connection (RS485) to an external equipment. Connection is made through thesubrack wiring board tagblock M65. This is done to connect the external equipment to the TMN network.The equipment controller unit carries out a mediation device function. Q2 interface is typically employedin a plesiochronous environment.

Q3 interface

Q3 interface allows connection with an operative system in local networks according to the IEEE 802.3standard. Connection to the network is established on the AUI–B2 ADAPTER/2 subunit, in turn pluggedinto the relevant subrack connectors area, to which the equipment controller is connected.

F interface

F Interface sets up a local connection (RS232) with a personal computer through connector (3) locatedon the unit front cover. This connection in turn enables the local operator to software manage theequipment and specifically to:

– display the current or stored alarm conditions– monitor performance– display or configure software presettings

Installation and updating of the equipment software (equipment controller and card controller) can bedownloaded.

These operations are detailed in the operator’s handbook.

Unit Management

A microprocessor (CPU – Central Processor Unit) manages the interfaces. It acquires data and makesit available to all the interfaces. The control logic bus and memories are mainly used to carry out thesefunctions.

Scope of the Control Logic Bus is to manage information swap among the various devices of the unit.It also processes the reset logic of the unit devices (CPU included), activated when:

– pushbutton (4) is pressed– the equipment is turned ON– the unit power supply fails– a unit local alarm is detected

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

159

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Detection of a local alarm turns ON red alarm LED (10)

The reset command activates LEDs (10) and (5).

The Memories are present in various specialized circuits. Connectors are also provided to install theoptional expansion memory modules. The FLASH (FEPROM) memories load software during installation.In this way, the equipment software release can be updated.

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 16. Equipment Controller SMEC 2A presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER SMEC 2A

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

Equipment controller SMEC23AL34649AAAA(487.156.720 C)

===>3AL34732AAAB(411.100.301 M)

Fig. 59. page 160 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

160

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

UNIT ALARMS TEST PUSHBUTTON

ALARMS PUSHBUTTON MEMORIZATION

”F” INTERFACE FOR CRAFT TERMINAL (PC)

UNIT RESET TEST

URGENT ALARM (RED LED)

NON URGENT ALARM (RED LED)

MEMORIZED ALARMS (YELLOW LED)

ANOMALOUS CONDITION (YELLOW LED)

INDICATIVE ALARM (YELLOW LED)

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

Fig. 59. Equipment Controller (EC): operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

161

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

CO

NN

EC

TO

R F

OR

ME

MO

RY

EX

PAN

SIO

NM

EM

OR

IES

TO

/FR

OM

UN

ITS

INT

ER

FAC

EU

NIT

DIA

LO

GU

E

TO

/FR

OM

SWIT

CH

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

CR

U

P R O T E C T.

FRO

MPO

WE

R S

UPP

LYM

AN

AG

EM

EN

TPO

WE

R S

UPP

LY

AN

DO

R/2

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

UN

IT P

RE

SEN

TFR

OM

UN

ITS

AN

DO

R/2

TO

/FR

OM

E U

NIT

STA

TIO

NA

LA

RM

SC

OL

LE

CT

ION

M A N A G E M E N T

C O N T A C T

P A R A L L E L

RE

MO

TE

AL

AR

MS

AL

AR

MS

FOR

RA

CK

LE

D

A

INT

ER

FAC

E

LE

D

DR

IVE

FIN

TE

RFA

CE

LO

CA

LT

ER

MIN

AL

INT

ER

FAC

EQ

2M

ED

IAT

ION

DE

VIC

E

INT

ER

FAC

EQ

3O

PER

AT

ION

SYST

EM

INT

ER

NA

LA

LA

RM

Fig. 60. Equipment Controller: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

162

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.12 Power supply unitSee Fig. 61. on page 163 and Fig. 62. on page 164.

The Power Supply unit converts the –48Vdc or –60Vdc nominal battery voltage into three stabilized andgalvanically isolated dc voltages (+5.3V, –5.5V and –12.1V).

The two decoupled battery inputs (–BATT1 and –BATT2) provided make duplicated power supplypossible.

The following is accessible on the Power Supply unit front coverplate:

– The CM1 ON/OFF switch (1) – a green LED (5) indicating regular operation of the unit– output voltage test points (2), (3), (4).

The battery inputs are decoupled through mosfet circuits and controlled through error amplifiers which arepowered through the relevant battery voltages.

An EMC filter, to protect against induced noise, and the current breakaway limiter are fitted at the outputof the mosfet circuits.

The battery voltage is applied at the power stage whose function is to generate the a.c. voltage to feedthe transformer’s primary winding; from the secondary winding are derived the voltages (galvanicallyisolated vs. input) which will be utilized to generate the three d.c. output voltages.

The auxiliary a.c. voltages produce, through the synchronous rectifiers, the +5V and –5V voltages, andthrough the schottky diodes the –12 V voltage. These voltages subsequently pass through the relevantLC networks thus obtaining the required DC outputs.

The +5V output voltage is utilized as reference voltage and forwarded to the control circuit thus realizing,through the duty–cycle variation of the AC voltage on the transformer’s primary winding, the requiredstability vs. load variations and power supply voltage.

The +12V and –5V voltages are also locally stabilized through magnetic amplifying circuits.

All the outputs are provided with current limiters achieved by testing the voltages across the shunt resistor.

The three voltages are provided with devices series connected to the outputs so as to parallel–connectto other power supply units. Specifically, mosfets are provided on the –5V and +5V voltages, while aschottky diode is utilized on the –12V voltage.

The presence of an overvoltage condition on any of the three voltages delivered activates an irreversiblecut–off circuit so as to maintain equipment integrity. Therefore, to restore the Power Supply unit back toregular operation adjust the input switch.

In these circumstances, the green unit LED switches OFF and an alarm indication (open circuit) will bepresent on pin FAIL.

The unit is provided with an EEPROM utilized as Remote Inventory.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

163

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE TEST POINT – +5.3V5,3125,5

ON/OFF SWITCH

REGULAR OPERATION LED

POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE TEST POINT – +12V

POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE TEST POINT – –5.5V

Fig. 61. Power supply unit (PS): operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

164

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

PO

WE

RA

ND

CO

NT

RO

LS

TAG

E

CU

RR

EN

TLI

MIT

ER

MO

SF

ET

MO

SF

ET

MO

SF

ET

MO

SF

ETS

CH

OT

TK

Y

MA

G.

AM

P.

MA

G.

AM

P.

4

5

321

CU

RR

EN

TC

ON

TR

OL

STA

GE

CO

NT

RO

LS

TAG

E

CO

NT

RO

LS

TAG

EP

ULS

EW

IDT

HA

DJU

ST

ME

NT IRR

EV

ER

SIB

LEP

RO

TE

CT

ION

RE

MO

TE

INV

ET

OR

Y

AU

XIL

IAR

YP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

LIM

ITE

R

Fig. 62. Power supply unit: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

165

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.13 I/O extensionSee Fig. 63. on page 166.

The unit operates as a parallel interface towards the supervision system, thus making available 48 alarmsand 24 remote commands. Dialogue between I/O extension and EC unit takes place in a serial mode.Alarms and remote commands are available at point (1) of the I/O extension unit. A Q0IP–like interfaceis used for the EC communication.

Refer to the System Handbook for a description of the remote commands/alarms, in that they aresoftware–dependent.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

166

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ALARMS AND REMOTE COMMANDS FROM/TOPARALLELING SUPERVISION

SEE CHAPTER 3.3 FOR THEIR DESCRIPTION

Fig. 63. I/O extension: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

167

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.14 Service unitSee Fig. 64. on page 170, Fig. 65. on page 171 and Fig. 66. on page 172.

The Service unit includes the following circuits:

– AND OR– Q3 interface– IECB termination– Clock external driver

A description of each circuit follows.

AND ORSee Fig. 65. on page 171.

The function of this circuit consists of detecting the power faults from the station battery or the power faultsin the individual assemblies. It also processes the criteria coming from the Equipment Controller unit.These alarm statuses are processed in order to generate the rack lamp driving criteria (if any) and anumber of remote alarms.

The circuit power supplied through a –48 V auxiliary battery voltages. Should the unit power supply circuitfail, a PWANDOR criterion would be generated and sent to the Equipment Controller unit to drive a LED.

The station battery voltages (–BATT1, –BATT2) are controlled, or not, as a function of the settings made;it is thus possible to control either voltage or none or both.

A station battery failure alarm is set whenever it falls by approximately 20% below its nominal value. Thealarm disappears upon restoring the nominal value, apart from the applicable tolerances.

If both station batteries are alarmed, then an AND criterion and a TAND remote alarm are generated. TheAND alarm criterion is also OR–ed with the CAND criterion coming from the Equipment Controller unit.If one battery only is missing, then an OR criterion is generated, which is inhibited by the AND criterionand results in the TOR remote alarm and in the ORALIM criterion, which is sent to the Controller unit. AnMP criterion comes from the ESCT Equipment Controller unit and is OR–ed with a (settable) UA togenerate the AU signal. The AND, OR, and AU criteria are individually sent to an appropriate memorycircuit.

RNURG and RURG are the commands output to the rack lamps. RURG results from the summation ofthe power AND criteria and AU, both picked–up at memory output A, which is the non–stored output. Thealarm statuses can be stored by means of the C–command, which is controlled by a push–button locatedon the Equipment Controller unit.

Whenever the C–command is set, memory output A is deactivated and consequently the RAND and/orROR criteria are reset and the M output is set instead, which concurs to the generation of the M criterion.

If the alarm disappears, then all criteria and remote alarms possibly set are automaticallyRURG, RNURG, and M operate exactly as their corresponding alarms of the Equipment Controllertowards the rack top LEDs.The AND OR circuit complies with the IEC–950 safety norms.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

168

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Q3 InterfaceSee Fig. 66. on page 172.

Q3 interface is used to connect the equipment to a supervisory system via BNC female connector (5).

The Q3 interface is a coaxial cable transceiver. The Thin Ethernet (10 Base 2 or Cheapernet) consistsof the following functional blocks:

1 ) DC/DC converter and insulating transformers: implement the electrical insulation between theequipment and the transceiver cable.

2 ) Transceiver: implements the following functions as specified by the IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)standard:

a ) Transmit: the data from the equipment (DO–A, DO–B differential signals) is adapted to thelevels specified for the coaxial cable

b ) Receive: the data carried on the coaxial cable is sent to the equipment (DI–A, DI–Bdifferential signals)

c ) Collision detection: in case of collisions (two or several stations starting a transmissionsimultaneously), indicates transmission failure on the CI–A, CI–B signal pair

d ) Transmitted packet length control: an internal timer (jabber timer) stops the transmissionwhenever the data packet length exceeds the max. allowed by the standard. Transmissionfailure is detected on the CI signal pair.

The optional CO (control–out) signal specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard to disable/enable transmissionis not used and the module is permanently enabled (as specified by the standard in case of signal failure).

IECB – termination

The Local and Network IECB buses and relative clocks are 36 ohm terminated through this circuit. Anoutput buffer on high impedanced will then forward them towards the external source via the V.11 balancedinterface.

There are two termination circuits: one is utilized to transmit towards the BB Assembly (connector (4)),the other to transmit towards the Expansion Assembly (connector (3)).

Clock external driver

This circuit receives four 38 MHz clock frequencies from the four RRA units (line side) in the 3+1configuration or from RRA0 and RRA1 units in the 1+1 configuration, i.e., two clocks from RRA0, line sideand radio side, and 2 clocks from RRA1, line side and radio side.

Based on the alarms incoming from the RRA units and on the priority levels supplied by the Craft Terminal,the MUX will select one of the four clocks. The selected clock is sent to the AUX Party Line and, in the N+1version, is sent to the Expansion Assembly (front cover panel connectors (1) and (2)).

Alarm unit

Red LED (6) on the unit’s front coverplate is activated by the faulty card.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

169

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 17. Service unit presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

SERVICES

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

Services3CY04279AAAA(483.200.094 E)

===>3CY04278AAAA(411.200.375 S)

Fig. 64. page 170 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

170

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

IECB

IECB

SERVICE

CK

CK 38 MHz TO EXP

CK 38 MHz TO EXP

IECB LN TO EXP

IECB LN TO BB

Q3 INTERFACE

1

8

9

15

DATA (LOCAL) V.11 OUT (+)1

DATA (LOCAL) V.11 OUT (–)9

DATA (NETWORK) V.11 OUT (+)2

DATA (NETWORK) V.11 OUT (–)10

CLOCK V.11 OUT (+)3

CLOCK V.11 OUT (–)11

DATA (NETWORK) V.11 IN (+)7

DATA (NETWORK) V.11 IN (–)14

DATA (LOCAL) V.11 IN (+)8

DATA (LOCAL) V.11 IN (–)15

CLOCK V.11 IN (+)6

CLOCK V.11 IN (–)13

GROUND4

GROUND12

SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONPINS

5

6

4

3

2

1

Fig. 64. Service unit: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

171

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RM

INT

ER

FAC

E

RE

MO

TE

ALA

RM

EQ

PT

CO

NT

R.

RM

INT

ER

FAC

E

Fig. 65. Service unit: block diagram of the AND OR circuit

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

172

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

COAXCABLETRANS-CEIVER

5

Q3 INTERFACE CIRCUIT

MUX 2

CLOCK EXTERNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT

PRIORITY SIGNALS

CK 38.8 MHz

CK 38.8 MHz

CK 38.8 MHz

CK 38.8 MHz

ALARMS FROM RRA UNITS

CK 38.8 MHz

1 CK 38 MHzTO EXP.

CK 38 MHzTO EXP.

CK 38 MHzTO AUX

PARTY LINEUNIT

IECB TERMINATION

V.11 INT. IECBTO EXP.

6

63

+2V

36 ohm

36 ohm+2V

throughconnection

back panel

IECB

IECB

V.11 INT. IECBTO BB

6

64

+2V

36 ohm

36 ohm+2V

throughconnection

back panel

IECB

IECB

6

Fig. 66. Service unit: block diagram of the Q3 interface, IECB termination and Clock External driver

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

173

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.15 EOW repeater/double terminal unit (DTMF)See Fig. 67. on page 178 and Fig. 68. on page 179.

This unit has various operating facilities:

– the transmit timing signals can be selected by means of manual setting, among which the locallygenerated ones, the ones extracted from the receive end and the external timing signals (the latteronly for the East/West direction);

– by means of manual setting the speech channel can be configured as repeater or dual terminal.

A description of the unit circuits is given hereunder.

Receive end

The data received from West related to bearer 1 ”Rx64P1W” and bearer 2 ”Rx64P2W” are sent to G.703decoders P1 and P2 that are part of gate arrays CODI.

For operation the decoders make use of locally generated 8MHz clock CK. The NRZ decoded data andrelevant timing signals are selected by a switching circuit driven by ”KRW and KAISGW”; KRW selects oneof the two paths and KAISGW squelches the channel upon a loss of data on both paths.

The data and timing signals thus selected are sent to Rx COMBO W and to the digital party line; timingsignals SY/CK Rx W are forwarded to the TxE timing selection circuit. This description is also applicablefor the opposite direction.

Now Rx COMBO W extracts the analog speech signal Rx W that is sent to the party line circuit. The sameapplies to Rx COMBO E which retrieves the Rx E speech signal.

Analog level transit is possible if KOCRUW/KOCRUE alarms are activated, causing the analog signalextracted from Rx COMBO to be reinserted into Tx COMBO. As to the opposite direction the RxE speechis directly amplified and forwarded to the party line circuit.

Timing signals

The timing signals are independent for both directions and the direction transmitting towards East cannotselect the external timing signals. The external timing signals are supplied to the unit as twin signals”SY/CK 1–2 EXT”. An RS 422/423 interface converts the levels from balanced to HCMOS.

Tx W timing signals selection circuit first selects the external timing signals of bearer 1 or bearer 2, on thebasis of commands MOD1–MOD2/SOH1–SOH2 and KFTx1–KFTx2 (supplied by the 1+1 logic withserializer). Manual setting SZB is designed to inhibit the SOH signals.

Then out of local timing signals ”SY/CK LOC”, received timing signals ”SY/CK RxE” and external timingsignals ”SY/CK EXT” are chosen. This choice is made by means of manual setting SZC.

Active command KAISGE replaces received timing signals SY/CK RxE with the local timing signals.

As concerns the opposite direction selection is made between local timing signals SY/CK LOC andreceived timing signals SY/CK RxW by means of manual setting SZD. Here too active command KAISGWreplaces the received timing signals with the local timing signals. The local timing signals are generatedby a MASTER clock. A transition detector circuit supplies an alarm upon a fault (ALL. OSC.).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

174

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Transmit end

Through a hybrid the party line circuit addresses the channel Tx speech signal to TxE and TxW COMBOcircuits.

The COMBO circuits perform analog to digital conversion on the basis of timing signals SY/CK TxE –SY/CK TxW. The NRZ signal thus obtained with relevant timing signals is sent to the digital Party line.

The digital party line is inserted when the unit is configured as repeater. It is inhibited upon a fault on bothpaths (active KAISG) so that the erroneous data from the receive end are not summed up and do not transitany more. In this way, the local link in the other direction is maintained.

Manual setting SZE permits to exclude the digital party line and to configure the channel as dual terminal.The data at the digital party line output are split and forwarded to G.703 encoders P1 and P2 that are partof gate arrays CODI. For operation the encoders make use of timing signals SY/CK TxE, SY/CK TxW.The data thus encoded are sent to the unit output.

1+1 logic with serializer

As to the receive switching circuits this unit is independent thanks to the presence of two control logics(gate arrays LOG 11S) being independent as concerns the two directions. These logics process theinternal and external alarms and the remote and internal commands.

Serializing is performed by gate array LOG 11S direction E–W designed to switch primary information suchas alarms and remote commands related to both directions between the unit and a controller (if any)operating as a monitoring unit. Interface Q0IP is designed for serial switching of the above information.From a functional point of view interface Q0IP is made up of the following BUS signals:

– ALM DO– ALM EUMP– ALM ENi– ALM CK– ALM DI– ALM STR– ALM RW

The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual setting SZH is designed to receive whatfollows in an unbalanced mode:

– ALM DI– ALM STR– ALM RW

The above signals interface gate array LOG 11.S (E–W) through interface RS 422/423. The unit is featuredby an identification circuit. The following are external alarms:

– DEM I– FAT I– AVAILABLE I both for bearer 1 and 2 and for direction E and W– HBER I both for bearer 1 and 2 and for direction E and W– DEG e SAM I

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

175

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Remote commands are:

– REM1W/REM2W– REM1E/REM2E

The following are internal alarms

– MIR (loss of received pulses) I both for bearer 1 and 2– SYNC (loss of synchronism) I and for direction E and W

– ALL OSC (Oscillator alarm available at the tagblock)– ALM ALIM (generated upon a fault of the dc/dc converter)

Gate array LOG 11S also processes the command:

– POL BUSY

Even though the MIR alarm is generated inside the unit, it still is an alarm designating an external fault.Should the local operator’s set service be implemented in a 1+0 system, it is possible to inhibit the alarmsrelated to bearer 2 by means of SZL/SZM.

Gate arrays LOG 11S generate the following commands:

– KFTx1/KFTx2 (controller remote commands)– KRE/KRW (received data switching commands)– KAISGE/KAISGW (speech squelching commands)

Switching of information between the two gate arrays LOG 11S takes place by means of commandsKAISGW, KRW and remote commands W. The logic OR of internal alarms E and internal alarms Wactivates the general alarm and turns ON relevant LED (9). The general alarm is sent to the unit output.

Party line

This circuit delivers three paths at the tagblock: A–B–C. In Tx/Rx these paths have a fixed –3dBm levelfor paths B and C and a variable level for path A because of the presence of 0.5 to 15.5dB in 0.5dB stepsvariable attenuators.

Selective call

Analog speech signal Tx CHS/Rx CHS coming from the party line reaches the selective call circuitdesigned to transfer the signal to a Tp handset through a telephone hybrid. The selective call is integratedin gate array DTMF CALL. It permits to interconnect two users, whoever they may be, connected overthe same channel.

Interconnection between two users takes place in that the calling end selects the identification number ofthe desired user. Conversation is private. All other connected users hear the busy tone when activatingthe Tp handset. A third user may be included by means of an appropriate pushbutton, which is designatedby the inclusion tone.

Any user can also perform an in–conference call. In this case all other users receive the call and areenabled to listen only. By pressing the same pushbutton they may participate to the conversation.

By pressing pushbutton ”#” on the Tp handset, or line seizure key (4) it is possible participate to aconversation or to talk in–conference. This facility can be memorized by means of manual setting. In thiscase the pushbutton must not be kept pressed during conversation but should only be pressed to be ableto talk and be pressed again to interrupt the conversation.

Gate array ”DTMF CALL” generates the following tones:

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

176

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Free tone 450 Hz continuous

Busy tone 450 Hz 0.2/0.2 sec

Call check tone 450 Hz 0.8/2.4 sec

In conference call tone 450 Hz 0.8/0.8 sec

Inclusion tone 450 Hz 0.2/0.2/0.2/1 sec

The user’s number is hardware preset. User’s numbers available go from 10 to 99 while 00 stands forconference call. Through strap settings, reception of numbers made up of 3 digits can be preset. In thatcase, numbers available go from 100 to 999, while 000 stands for conference call. Selection of the numberis made through three switches, each one selecting a digit.

The unit front plate is provided with LEDs designating line free/ line busy and with line reset buzzer/linereset pushbuttons.

The line free condition is designated by green LED (6) turning ON. The selective call is activated by circuitSLIC, which is followed by the Tp handset and its pushbutton #, or line seizure key (4) turning ON. Theline busy condition is designated by yellow LED (5) turning ON. The call is designated by a buzzer insertedin the local operator’s set circuit. The buzzer is timed by the call tone (0.8 to 2.4 sec), to which correspondsflashing of yellow LED (5).

The buzzer is muted upon activating the Tp handset. If at the end of conversation the Tp handset is notturned OFF by a user, it does not mean that another call cannot be received; this time the call is designatedby a continuous tone. In this case the buzzer is muted by pressing pushbutton ”I” (4).

If neither of the users deactivates the Tp handset, the line remains busy. To release the line, presspushbutton RESET (7).

Local operator’s set

This circuit provided with a Tp handset with keyboard connected to point (8) is designed for two differenttypes of connection. Selection can be made by acting on selector switch (2).

The alternative connections of the Tp handset are:

– Internal connection, which is the most common and complete operation. The local operator’s set isconnected to the selective call.

– Two–wire connection, which permits to connect the local operator’s set Tp to another service channelwithout a Tp handset (TPH DESK); this connection can be made by means of an external cordconnected to socket SM2 (1).

The local operator’s set with external loudspeaker permits three types of operation managed by selectorswitch (3). The first activates the Tp handset, excluding the loudspeaker, the second activates theloudspeaker, excluding the Tp handset (listen only), the third inserts both the loudspeaker and the Tphandset in parallel.

Power supply

Manual setting SZL permits to insert/disinsert the unit power supply paralleling diodes. A dc/dc convertersupplies the unit with the (+15V –15V) voltages.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

177

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 18. EOW repeater/double terminal unit (DTMF) presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

EOW DTMF RIP/DT

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

POL DTMF repeater3CY00935AAAA(483.200.046 M)

===>3CY01797AAAA(411.200.195 F)

Fig. 67. page 178 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

178

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

EXT

UNIT ALARM VISUAL INDICATOR (RED LED)

LINE REST PUSHBUTTON

LINE FREE VISUAL INDICATOR (GREEN LED)

LINE BUSY VISUAL INDICATOR (YELLOW LED)

LINE ENGAGED PUSHBUTTON/BUZZER RESET

EXTERNAL LOUDSPEAKER/TP HANDSET/EXTERNAL LOUDSPEAKER +TP HANDSET SELECTION

REMOTE/INTERNAL LOC. OP. SET (POL)/REMOTE TP HANDSET SELECTION

REMOTE TP HANDSET SOCKET (WIRES A/B)

TP HANDSET WITH KEYBOARD SOCKET

Fig. 67. Terminal/repeater DTMF EOW service: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

179

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

EN

CO

DE

R

SEL

EC

TIV

EC

AL

L

3 PA

TH

S SP

EE

CH

BA

L.)

EN

CO

DE

R

LO

CA

LO

PER

AT

OR

SET

DE

CO

DE

R

DE

CO

DE

R

INT

ER

NA

LA

LA

RM

S W

INT

ER

NA

LA

LA

RM

S E

Tx

ET

IMIN

GSE

LE

CT

ION

CH

. SPE

EC

HSP

EE

CH

RxW SP

EE

CH

RxE

SPE

EC

H T

xE

INT

ER

NA

LA

LA

RM

S W

INT

ER

NA

LA

LA

RM

S E

SPEECH TxW

DE

CO

DE

R

DE

CO

DE

R

1+1

LO

GIC

(W

–E)

1+1

LO

GIC

(E

–W)

WIT

HSE

RIA

LIZ

ER

REMOTE WCOMMANDS

IDE

NT

IFIC

AT

ION

EN

CO

DE

R

EN

CO

DE

R

Tx

WT

IMIN

GSE

LE

CT

ION

RE

MO

TE

CO

MM

AN

DS

W

EX

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

M W

RE

MO

TE

CO

MM

AN

DS

E

EX

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

M E

Fig. 68. EOW repeater unit DTMF: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

180

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.16 TPH DESK repeater/D.T. unit (DTMF)See Fig. 69. on page 184 and Fig. 70. on page 185.

This unit is utilized on repeater configuration. However, through presettings (SZD) it can also be utilizedon terminal configuration (dual terminal configuration). This modality converts the “A” analogue path intodigital for connection towards the other terminal.

Receive end

The data received from West related to carrier 1 “Rx64P1W” and carrier 2 “Rx64P2W” are sent to the G703 decoders P1 and P2 that are part of the CODI gate arrays.

For their operation the decoders make use of the locally generated 8 MHz clock CK. The NRZ decodeddata are selected by a switching device driven by “KRW and KAISGW”. KRW selects one of the two paths,while KAISGW squelches the channel upon a loss of data on both paths.

The data thus selected is sent to the COMBO Rx W and to the digital Party Line. The SY/CK Rx W timingsignals besides being sent to the Rx and Tx Combo are also sent to the G.703 coder of Gate Array CODI.The above also applies to the opposite direction.

Now the Rx W COMBO extracts the analog Rx W speech signal that is sent to the Party Line circuit. Thisapplies also to the Rx E COMBO that extracts the Rx E speech signal.

Timing

Active command KAISGE replaces received SY/CK RxE timing with local timing.

Local timing is generated by a MASTER clock. Upon a fault, a transition detector circuit supplies an alarm(ALL OSC).

Transmit end

By means of a hybrid the Tx channel speech signal is addressed from the Party Line to the TxE COMBOand to the TxW COMBO.

The COMBO circuits perform analog to digital conversion on the basis of the SY/CK RxE and SY/CK RxWtiming. The NRZ signal thus converted with relevant timing is sent to the digital Party Line.

The digital Party Line is inserted when the unit is configured as repeater. Upon a fault on both paths (activecommand KAISG) it is inhibited so that the errored data coming from the receive end are not summed upand do not transit. In this way, the local link is maintained in the opposite direction.

Logic with serializer

The unit is independent as concerns receive switching. This is assured by two control logics (LOG 11Sgate arrays) that are independent for the two directions. The logics process internal alarms, externalalarms, remote commands and internal commands.

The serializer function is contained in the LOG 11S gate array in the E–W direction. It permits primaryinformation switching such as alarms and remote commands related to both directions between the unitand any control unit operating as monitor.

The Q0IP interface provides for serial switching of this information. From a functional point of view the Q0IPinterface is made up of the following BUS signals:

– ALM DO– ALM EUMP– ALM ENi

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

181

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ALM CKALM DIALM STRALM RW

The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual settings SZH control the following receivesignals in an unbalanced mode:

– ALM DI– ALM STR– ALM RW

The above signals interface the LOG 11 S gate array (E–W) through the RS 422/423 interface. The unitis featured by an identifier circuit.

The external alarms are made up of the following:

– DEM |– FAT |– AVAILABLE | both for carrier 1 and 2 and for the E and W direction– HBER |– DEG and SAM |

The following are remote commands:

– REM1W/REM2W– REM1E/REM2E

The following are internal alarms:

– MIR (loss of received pulses) | both for carrier 1 and 2– SYNC (loss of synchronism) | and for the E and W direction

– ALL OSC (oscillator alarm available at the tagblock)– ALM ALIM (generated upon a fault of the DC/DC converter)

The LOG 11S gate array also processes the following command:

– POL BUSY (unused)

Even though the MIR alarm is generated inside the unit, it designates an external fault.

The LOG 11S gate arrays generate the following commands:

– KFTx1/KFTx2 (remote commands from the control unit)– KRE/KRW (received data switching commnds)– KAISGE/KAISGW (speech squelching commands)

Information switching between the two LOG 11S gate arrays takes place through KAISGW, KRW andremote W commands.

The logic OR of internal alarms E and internal alarms W activates a general alarm and turns ON visualindicator (9). The general alarm is sent to the unit output.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

182

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Party line

The Party Line outputs three paths viz. A,B and C. At the Tx/Rx end the three paths have a fixed –3 dBmlevel for paths B and C and a variable level on path A because 0.5 to 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB steps variableattenuators are present here.

Selective call

The analog Tx CHS/Rx CHS speech signal reaches the selective call from the Party Line. Through atelephone hybrid the selective call transfers the signal to the microtelephone.

The selective call is integrated in the DTMF CALL gate array. It permits two users to be linked over thesame channel.

Connection between two users takes place when the caller dials the identification number of the desireduser. The conversation is private. All other users hear the busy tone through the microtelephone. A thirduser may be connected by acting on the appropriate key.His presence is indicated by the inclusion tone.

Besides, any user may perform an in–conference call. In this case all other users receive the call and areenabled to listen only. They may participate to the call by pressing the same key.

When participating to a conversation or an in–conference call it is necessary to press key # on themicrotelephone or seizure key (4). This may be memorized through manual setting. In this case it is notnecessary to keep the key pressed, but it is sufficient to press the key to talk and to press it again to interruptthe operation.

The DTMF CALL gate array generates the following tones:

– Free tone 450 Hz continuous– Busy tone 450 Hz 0.2/0.2 s– Call control tone 450 Hz 0.8/2.4 s– In conference tone 450 Hz 0.8/0.8 s– Inclusion tone 450 Hz 0.2/0.2/0.2/1 s

The user’s number is through hardware setting. The available user’s numbers range from 10 to 99, while00 identifies the in–conference call.

Through soldering straps it is possible to receive a number of three figures.

In this case the available numbers range from 100 to 999, while the in–conference call is identified with000.

The number is selected by means of three switches, each one of which selects one figure.

The unit front plate is provided with free/busy line visual indicators and buzzer/line reset pushbuttons.

The free line condition is designated by green LED (6) turning ON. The selective call is activated by theSLIC circuit upon switching ON of the microtelephone and by acting on key # situated on themicrotelephone or on line seizure key (4).

The busy line condition is designated by yellow LED (5) turning ON.

If both users do not exclude the microtelephone set, the line will remain engaged. To release the line pressthe RESET key (7).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

183

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 19. TPH DESK rep/D.T. unit (DTMF) presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

TPH DESK repeater unit (DTMF)

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

BCA DTMF Repeater3CY02288AAAA(483.200.047 N)

===>3CY02289AAAA(411.200.196 G)

Fig. 69. page 184 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

184

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

LINE RESET KEY

LINE FREE (GREEN LED)

LINE BUSY (YELLOW LED)

INCLUSION KEY

REMOTE MICROTELEPHONE SOCKET (A/B WIRES)

Fig. 69. TPH DESK REP/DT (DTMF): operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

185

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

3 PA

TH

S SP

EE

CH

(–3d

Bm

/600

ohm

BIL

.)

EN

CO

DE

RG

.703

P1

(G.A

.CO

DI)

DE

CO

DE

RG

.703

P1

(G.A

.CO

DI)

DE

CO

DE

RG

.703

P1

(G.A

.CO

DI)

G.7

03 P

1 (G

.A.C

OD

I)

PAR

TY

LIN

E

DIG

ITA

LPA

RT

Y L

INE

SZE

SZL SZ

M

DE

CO

DE

RG

.703

P1

(G.A

.CO

DI)

(G.A

. LO

G. 1

1S)

EX

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

M W

RE

MO

TE

CO

MM

AN

DS

W

POL BUSY

KAISGWKRW

REMOTE

COMMANDS

1+1

LO

GIC

(E

–W)

(G.A

. LO

G. 1

1S)

WIT

H

SZH

SER

IAL

IZE

R

IDE

NT

IFIC

AC

ION

PAR

TY

LIN

ED

IGIT

AL

SZE

AL

AR

MS

WIN

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

MS

EIN

TE

RN

AL

EN

CO

DE

RG

.703

P1

(G.A

.CO

DI)

G.7

03 P

1 (G

.A.C

OD

I)

OSC

. AL

M

DE

CO

DIF

ICA

DO

RG

.703

P1

(G.A

.CO

DI)

SZL

SZI

SZL

A/B

WIR

E

CA

LL

SEL

EC

TIV

ED

TM

F

65

47

9

KA

ISG

EK

RE

EN

CO

DE

R

INT

ER

NA

LA

LA

RM

S W

AL

AR

MS

EIN

TE

RN

AL

EN

CO

DE

R

1+1

LO

GIC

(W

–E)

W

EX

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

M E

RE

MO

TE

CO

MM

AN

DS

E

SY/C

KR

xW

SY/C

KR

xW

SY/C

KR

xE

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

SY/C

KR

xE

1

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

Fig. 70. TPH DESK repeater/D.T. unit DTMF: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

186

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.17 VF for DTMF DTSee Fig. 71. on page 189 and Fig. 72. on page 190.

This unit is utilized on repeater configuration. However, through presettings (SZD) it can also be utilizedon terminal configuration (dual terminal configuration). This modality converts the “A” analogue path intodigital for connection towards the other terminal.

Receive end

The data received from West related to carrier 1 “Rx64P1W” and carrier 2 “Rx64P2W” are sent to the G703 decoders P1 and P2 that are part of the CODI gate arrays.

For their operation the decoders make use of the locally generated 8 MHz clock CK. The NRZ decodeddata are selected by a switching device driven by “KRW and KAISGW”. KRW selects one of the two paths,while KAISGW squelches the channel upon a loss of data on both paths.

The data thus selected is sent to the COMBO Rx W and to the digital Party Line. The SY/CK Rx W timingsignals besides being sent to the Rx and Tx Combo are also sent to the G.703 coder of Gate Array CODI.The above also applies to the opposite direction.

Now the Rx W COMBO extracts the analog Rx W speech signal that is sent to the Party Line circuit. Thisapplies also to the Rx E COMBO that extracts the Rx E speech signal.

Timing

Active command KAISGE replaces received SY/CK RxE timing with local timing.

Local timing is generated by a MASTER clock. Upon a fault, a transition detector circuit supplies an alarm(ALL OSC).

Transmit end

By means of a hybrid the Tx channel speech signal is addressed from the Party Line to the TxE COMBOand to the TxW COMBO.

The COMBO circuits perform analog to digital conversion on the basis of the SY/CK RxE and SY/CK RxWtiming. The NRZ signal thus converted with relevant timing is sent to the digital Party Line.

The digital Party Line is inserted when the unit is configured as repeater. Upon a fault on both paths (activecommand KAISG) it is inhibited so that the errored data coming from the receive end are not summed upand do not transit. In this way, the local link is maintained in the opposite direction.

Logic with serializer

The unit is independent as concerns receive switching. This is assured by two control logics (LOG 11Sgate arrays) that are independent for the two directions. The logics process internal alarms, externalalarms, remote commands and internal commands.

The serializer function is contained in the LOG 11S gate array in the E–W direction. It permits primaryinformation switching such as alarms and remote commands related to both directions between the unitand any control unit operating as monitor.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

187

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

The Q0IP interface provides for serial switching of this information. From a functional point of view the Q0IPinterface is made up of the following BUS signals:

– ALM DO– ALM EUMP– ALM ENi– ALM CK– ALM DI– ALM STR– ALM RW

The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual settings SZH control the following receivesignals in an unbalanced mode:

– ALM DI– ALM STR– ALM RW

The above signals interface the LOG 11 S gate array (E–W) through the RS 422/423 interface. The unitis featured by an identifier circuit.

The external alarms are made up of the following:

– DEM |– FAT |– AVAILABLE | both for carrier 1 and 2 and for the E and W direction– HBER |– DEG and SAM |

The following are remote commands:

– REM1W/REM2W– REM1E/REM2E

The following are internal alarms:

– MIR (loss of received pulses) | both for carrier 1 and 2– SYNC (loss of synchronism) | and for the E and W direction

– ALL OSC (oscillator alarm available at the tagblock)– ALM ALIM (generated upon a fault of the DC/DC converter)

Even though the MIR alarm is generated inside the unit, it designates an external fault.

The LOG 11S gate arrays generate the following commands:

– KFTx1/KFTx2 (remote commands from the control unit)– KRE/KRW (received data switching commnds)– KAISGE/KAISGW (speech squelching commands)

Information switching between the two LOG 11S gate arrays takes place through KAISGW, KRW andremote W commands.

The logic OR of internal alarms E and internal alarms W activates a general alarm and turns ON visualindicator (9). The general alarm is sent to the unit output.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

188

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Party line

The Party Line outputs three paths viz. A,B and C. At the Tx/Rx end the three paths have a fixed –3 dBmlevel for paths B and C and a variable level on path A because 0.5 to 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB steps variableattenuators are present here.

Setting options

The unit is provided with one settable sub–unit:

Tab. 20. VF for DTMF DT presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

VF for DTMF DT

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

Party line DT3CY00936AAAA(483.200.057 Q)

===>3CY01569AAAA(411.200.209 D)

Fig. 71. page 189 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

189

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

UNIT ALARM (RED LED)

Fig. 71. VF for DTMF DT: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

190

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

EN

CO

DE

RG

.703

P1

(G.A

.CO

DI)

DE

CO

DE

RG

.703

P1

(G.A

.CO

DI)

G.7

03 P

1 (G

.A.C

OD

I)

G.7

03 P

1 (G

.A.C

OD

I)

PAR

TY

LIN

E

PAR

TY

LIN

ED

IGIT

AL

SZE

SZL SZ

M

G.7

03 P

1 (G

.A.C

OD

I)

1+1

LO

GIC

(W

–E)

(G.A

. LO

G. 1

1S)

EX

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

M W

RE

MO

TE

CO

MM

AN

DS

W

POL BUSY

KAISGW

KRW

REMOTE

COMMANDS

(G.A

. LO

G. 1

1S)

WIT

H

SZH

SER

IAL

IZE

R

IDE

NT

IFIC

AC

ION

SZE

AL

AR

MS

WIN

TE

RN

AL

G.7

03 P

1 (G

.A.C

OD

I)

G.7

03 P

1 (G

.A.C

OD

I)D

EC

OD

ER

G.7

03 P

1 (G

.A.C

OD

I)

SZL

SZI

SZL

(–3d

Bm

/600

ohm

BIL

.)

3 PA

TH

S SP

EE

CH

EN

CO

DE

R

AL

AR

MS

E

INT

ER

NA

L

PAR

TY

LIN

ED

IGIT

AL

AL

AR

MS

WIN

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

MS

EIN

TE

RN

AL

DE

CO

DE

R

EN

CO

DE

R

1+1

LO

GIC

(E

–W)

W

RE

MO

TE

CO

MM

AN

DS

E

EX

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

M E

EN

CO

DE

R

DE

CO

DE

R

SY/C

KR

xW

SY/C

KR

xW

SY/C

KR

xE

SY/C

KR

xE

(64

KB

IT/S

)

CL

OC

K

OSC

.A

LM

.

CK

8 M

HZ

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

DIG

ITA

LSP

EE

CH

MA

STE

R

Fig. 72. VF for DTMF DT: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

191

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.18 Terminal station 8x1200baud data serviceSee Fig. 73. on page 194 and to Fig. 74. on page 195.

This unit serializes the signalling criteria of the speech channels the assembly is provided with.

At the transmit end interface RS232 converts the seven 1200baud data streams ”data in W” and pilot signal”Pil. Tx W” sent by the supervision system to HCMOS levels. Signal Pil. Tx W, if present, is sent to an alarmdetector circuit through manual setting SZA.

If said signal is not present, it can be replaced by the locally generated signal CK 1200 by means of SZA.Anyway signal CK 1200 replaces signal Pil. loc. W in case alarm All. Pil. loc. W is active. Said alarm controlsthe switching circuit. Signal Pil. Tx W thus selected is sent to the MUX circuit.

In case of All. Pil. loc. W, monitoring absence of the local pilot, data transit is blocked. This data block canbe inhibited by means of manual setting SZB.

Now the seven data streams and pilot Pil. Tx W are sent to the MUX circuit. For operation MUX makesuse of timing signals SY/CK TxW. They are the result of switching between the local timing signals (Loc.),external timing signals (EXT) and the timing signals associated to the received data.

The local timing signals are generated in the unit provided with two oscillators. One of them generates thetiming signals related to G.703 codecoding and data multiplexing. Upon a fault alarm ALL. OSC isoriginated.

The other oscillator generates CK 1200 that may replace the pilot. Signal CK 1200 is sent to the unit outputby means of interface RS 232. The second oscillator also generates clock CK Rig. This clock is sent tothe regenerator gate array. The CK Rig. frequency can be varied by means of SZD in case of transmissionswith intervals depending on how long the intervals last.

The unit receives the external timing signals as twin signals SY/CK EXT 1/2 W. Interface RS 422/423converts the levels to HCMOS. On the basis of commands MOD1W–MOD2W/SOH1W–SOH2W as wellas on remote commands FTx1W–FTx2W supplied by the 1+1 logic with serializer an external timing signalselection circuit selects one path.

Commands SOH can be inhibited by means of SZE. KTA EW and KTB EW are sent from the externaltiming signals selection circuit to the unit output and as far as KTB EW is concerned also to the 1+1 logicwith serializer.

The timing signals associated to the received data are extracted as will be described hereafter. On thebasis of KAISGE and SZM the switching circuit selects the timing signals implemented in datatransmission (SY/CKTxW).

Signal NRZ Tx W at the MUX output is split and forwarded to the G.703 encoders that are part of gatearrays CODI. For operation these gate arrays make use of timing signals CK 8192 / SY/CKTxW. The datathus encoded are sent to the unit output.

At the receive end the data are decoded by gate arrays CODI utilizing CK 8192. The data with code NRZRx 1E at the decoders output and relevant timing signals SY/CK Rx 1E are forwarded to the demultiplexer.At the same time on the basis of command KRE the timing signals are sent to the Tx timing signalsselection circuit.

The DEMUX circuit demultiplexes signals NRZ Rx and restitutes eight data streams. Then these streamsare filtered before being sent to the regenerator gate array. As a matter of fact this is applicable for bothbearers.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

192

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

The purpose of the regenerator is to regenerate the data on the basis of ”CK RIG” and to select one ofthe two bearers as a function of KRE/KAISGE. Command BYPASSR generated by the logic with serializerand SZF combined in OR generate command BYPR; when active this command originates theregenerator bypass.

Upon a fault two pilot alarm detecting circuits generate signals ”All. Pil. Rx1E” ”All. Pil. Rx2E”. The eightstreams outgoing from the regenerator are converted to RS 232 levels and sent to the unit output.

The unit is managed by the 1+1 logic with serializer made up of gate array LOG 11S. It processes externaland internal alarms and remote commands. The serializer is designed to switch over the primaryinformation such as alarms and remote commands between the unit and a controller (if any) operating asa monitoring unit. Interface Q0IP controls serial switching of this information.

From a functional point of view interface Q0IP is made up of the following BUS signals:

– ALM DO– ALM EUMP– ALM ENi– ALM CK– ALM DI– ALM STR– ALM RW

The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual settings SZG permit to receive the followingsignals in an unbalanced mode:

– ALM DI– ALM STR– ALM RW

They interface gate array LOG 11.S through interface RS422/423. The unit is featured by an identificationcircuit.

The following are external alarms:

– DEM1/2– FAT1/2– AVAILABLE 1/2– HBER 1/2– DEG or SAM 1/2

Degraded criteria DEG or SAM 1/2 and HBER 1/2 may be inhibited by means of manual setting SZH.

The following are remote commands:

– REM1/REM2

The internal alarms are:

– ALL OSC.– ALL ALIM (dc/dc converter faulty)– ALL. PIL. LOC W– KTBEW (related to external timing signals)– All. Pil. Rx 1E/Rx 2E

Should the unit be implemented in a 1+0 system, it is possible to inhibit the internal alarms related to theunused bearer by means of manual setting SZL.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

193

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

The gate array generates the following commands:

FTx1/2W (remote commands from PCD)KRE (received data switching commands)KAISGE (receive AIS command) bypass R.

The latter combined in logic OR with manual setting SZF activates command bypass PR.

The logic OR of internal alarms, alarm OSC, ALL. G.A. E and ALL. Pil. loc. W, originates ALL. GEN. andcauses relevant LED (1) to turn ON. External timing signals SY/CK EXT are sent to the unit output throughinterface RS422.

Manual settings SZI are designed to insert/disinsert the unit power supply paralleling diodes. A dc/dcconverter supplies the unit with the +15V/–15V voltages.

Setting options

Tab. 21. 8x1200 data service terminal, presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

8x1200 baud Data Service Terminal (USK)

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

8x1200 baud Data ServiceTerminal

3CY07400AAAA(411.200.149 Y)

===> ===> Fig. 73. page 194 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

194

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

UNIT ALARM INDICATOR (RED LED)

Fig. 73. Terminal 8x1200baud data service (USK): operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

195

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

EN

CO

DE

RG

.703

P1

G.A

. CO

DI

EN

CO

DE

RG

.703

P2

G.A

. CO

DI

DE

CO

DE

RG

.703

P2

G.A

. CO

DI

DE

CO

DE

RG

.703

P1

G.A

. CO

DI

Tx

TIM

ING

SEL

EC

TIO

N

DIG

ITA

LFI

LTE

RS

DIG

ITA

LFI

LTE

RS

INT

ER

NA

L A

LA

RM

S 1E

INT

ER

NA

L A

LA

RM

S 2E

1+1

LO

GIC

WIT

H S

ER

IAL

IZE

R

TIM

E B

ASE

G.A.REGENERATOR

IDE

NT

IFIC

AT

ION

EX

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

MS

RE

MO

TE

CO

MM

AN

DS

Fig. 74. Terminal 8x1200baud data service: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

196

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.19 Terminal station multirate data service (Nx2400)See Fig. 75. on page 199 and Fig. 76. on page 200 and Fig. 77. on page 201.

Through interface RS232 or V11 this unit supplies the user with the following data streams:

– 2x2400bauds– 1x4800bauds– 1x9600bauds

Selection is made by means of manual setting. Setting SZA is provided to set the input and outputinterfaces. Then the data signal to be transmitted (D1 to W and D2 to W) is converted to HCMOS levelsbefore travelling through an inverter and an amplifier from where it is sent as (CH1W/CH2W) to a MUX.

Through setting SZB the idle state (0/1) is selected in accordance with the supervision implemented.Should signal ALL SPV be active, the data signal towards MUX is inhibited. ALL SPV is the logic ANDcombination of the user’s alarm and SZC.

MUX converts the low speed data streams to a 64kbit/s PCM channel with NRZ code. For conversion itmakes use of timing signals Sync TxW and CK64 TxW. How these timing signals are generated isexplained hereafter.

Signal NRZ TxW is split over two paths and sent to two G.703 encoders. For operation they make use ofCK 8192 (generated by the unit) as well as of synchronism and transmit clock (Sy/CK TxW). Through theoutput interfaces the encoded signal is sent to the unit output (Tx64P1/Tx64P2).

As concerns the receive end, through the input interfaces signals Rx64P1 and Rx64P2 are sent to theG.703 decoders. On the basis of CK 8192 the decoders extract the NRZ signal (NRZ Rx1E/NRZ Rx2E)and relevant timing signals (Sync Rx/CK Rx).

When the unit receives the AIS, two AIS detectors connected between the input interfaces and thedecoders generate alarms Sync 1E/Sync 2E. For operation the AIS detectors make use of CK 2048. Upona loss of received pulses the decoders generate alarms MIR 1E/MIR 2E.

A switching device selects either NRZ Rx1E or NRZ Rx2E with associated timing signals. The switchingdevice is controlled by command KRE.

In case of a loss of data received from both paths, the switching circuit that follows driven by commandKAISGE selects local timing signals Sync Loc/CK 64 Loc and an NRZ signal of all ”1’s” (+V).

Now signal NRZ RxE with relevant timing is forwarded to DEMUX 1 or to DEMUX 2, in case two 2400bauddata streams have been transmitted. DEMUX 2 is enabled by means of setting SZD, so depending uponthe circumstances DEMUX 1 extracts D1RE or DEMUX 2 extracts D1RE and D2RE. Then the data arefiltered by a digital filter, at the output of which either D1RE (4800/9600bauds) or D1RE and D2RE(2x2400bauds) will be available.

Through logic inverters, output interfaces and output level selector switches the data are sent to the unitoutput. External timing signals reach the unit as twin signals (SY/CK EXT). An interface circuit convertsthe levels from RS422/423 to HCMOS.

A logic selects the external timing signals related to bearer 1 or bearer 2 by means of criteriaMOD1W–MOD2W, SOH1W–SOH2W and FTx1W–FTx2W (the latter are forwarded by the 1+1 logic withserializer). Criteria SOH1W–SOH2W may be inhibited by means of manual setting SZF.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

197

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

On the basis of the above mentioned criteria the logic generates commands KTAEW and KTBEW. Thefirst command is forwarded to the 1+1 logic with serializer. The second selects the external timing signals.Then out of external timing signals (Sync EXTW, CK EXTW) received timing signals (Sync RxE, CK RxE)and local timing signals (Sync Loc, CK64 Loc) are selected. This selection can be made by means ofmanual setting SZ6.

Timing signals Sync TxW/CK64 TxW are available at the switching circuit output. The local timing signalsare generated by an oscillator. Upon a fault of the oscillator alarm ALL OSC is originated and forwardedto the unit output and at the same time to a logic OR with ALL DC that indicates a dc/dc converter fault.

Alarm ALL INT is sent to the 1+1 logic with serializer. The unit power supply is duplicated. Manual settingsSZL/SZM permit to insert/disinsert the paralleling diodes. The unit is managed by the 1+1 logic withserializer consisting of gate array LOG 11S. The logic processes the external and internal alarms and theremote and internal commands. Besides, interface Q0IP allows for serial switching of the primaryinformation between gate array LOG 11S and the controller.

The following are external alarms:

– DEM– FAT– AVAILABLE– HBER– DEG – SAM

Remote commands are REM 1/REM 2

Internal alarms and commands are:

– ALL INT: logic OR of ALL OSC and ALL DC– MIR 1E/MIR 2E– Sync 1E/Sync 2E (strap SZH is provided to squelch alarms MIR/Sync related to the unused bearer

(1+0))– KTAEW related to external timing signals

Interface Q0IP is made up of the following BUS signals:

– ALM DO– ALM EUMP– ALM ENi– ALM CK– ALM DI– ALM STR– ALM RW

The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual setting SZI permits to receive the followingin an unbalanced mode:

– ALM DI– ALM STR– ALM RW

They interface gate array LOG 11.S through interface RS 232/423. The unit is featured by an identificationcircuit.

Gate array LOG 11.S generates the following commands:

– FTx1W–FTx2W being remote commands from the controller unit

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

198

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

– KRE being a received data switching command– KAISGE being an AIS insert command

A unit fault is signalled by general alarm ALL GEN with relevant LED turning ON. Alarm ALL GEN is thelogic OR combination of OR CE, ALL INT and ALL GAE (gate array alarm).

Setting options

Tab. 22. (Nx2400) multirate data service terminal, presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

Servizio Dati Terminale Multirate Nx2400 (USK)

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

Multirate (Nx2400) Data Serv.Terminal

3CY02526AAAA(474.282.245 M)

===> ===> Fig. 75. page 199 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

199

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

UNIT ALARM INDICATOR (RED LED)

Fig. 75. Terminal multirate data service (USK): operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

200

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

DE

TE

CT

OR

DE

TE

CT

OR U

SER

AL

AR

M

EN

CO

DE

R

EN

CO

DE

R

DE

CO

DE

R

DE

CO

DE

R

FILT

ER

Fig. 76. Terminal multirate data service (Tx/Rx): block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

201

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

EX

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

M 1

EX

TE

RN

AL

AL

AR

M 2

1+1

LO

GIC

WIT

H

SER

IAL

IZE

R

Fig. 77. Terminal multirate data service (timing and 1+1 logic): block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

202

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.20 AND OR/SSee Fig. 78. on page 203 and Fig. 79. on page 204.

The function of this unit consists of detecting the power faults from the station battery or the power faultsin the individual assemblies. It also processes the criteria coming from the Equipment Controller unit.These alarm statuses are processed in order to generate the rack lamp driving criteria (if any) and anumber of remote alarms.

The AND OR/S unit is power supplied through a –48 V auxiliary battery voltages. Should the unit powersupply circuit fail, a PWANDOR criterion would be generated and sent to the Equipment Controller unitto drive a LED.

The station battery voltages (–BATT1, –BATT2) are controlled, or not, as a function of the settings made;it is thus possible to control either voltage or none or both.

A station battery failure alarm is set whenever it falls by approximately 20% below its nominal value. Thealarm disappears upon restoring the nominal value, apart from the applicable tolerances.

If both station batteries are alarmed, then an AND criterion and a TAND remote alarm are generated. TheAND alarm criterion is also OR–ed with the CAND criterion coming from the Equipment Controller unit.If one battery only is missing, then an OR criterion is generated, which is inhibited by the AND criterionand results in the TOR remote alarm and in the ORALIM criterion, which is sent to the Controller unit. AnMP criterion comes from the ESCT Equipment Controller unit and is OR–ed with a (settable) UA togenerate the AU signal. The AND, OR, and AU criteria are individually sent to an appropriate memorycircuit.

RNURG and RURG are the commands output to the rack lamps. RURG results from the summation ofthe power AND criteria and AU, both picked–up at memory output A, which is the non–stored output. Thealarm statuses can be stored by means of the C–command, which is controlled by push–button (2) locatedon the Equipment Controller unit.

Whenever the C–command is set, memory output A is deactivated and consequently the RAND and/orROR criteria are reset and the M output is set instead, which concurs to the generation of the M criterion.

If the alarm disappears, then all criteria and remote alarms possibly set are automaticallyRURG, RNURG, and M operate exactly as their corresponding alarms of the Equipment Controllertowards the rack top LEDs.Unit AND OR/3 complies with the IEC–950 safety norms.

Setting options

Tab. 23. AND OR/S presettable Unit/Sub–unit

HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

AND OR/S

Unit/subunit to preset Belonging toUnit/subunit

Belonging toUnit/subunit

Module/Unit

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

NameANV P/N

(Factory P/N)FIG. POS.

AND–OR/S3CY03029AAAA(487.230.127 U)

===>3CY03098AAAA(474.230.098 M)

Fig. 78. page 203 –

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

203

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Fig. 78. AND/OR: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

204

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

RM

INT

ER

FAC

E

RE

MO

TE

ALA

RM

EQ

PT

CO

NT

R.

RM

INT

ER

FAC

E

Fig. 79. AND OR/S adapter: block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

205

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

2.5.21 IECB – terminationSee Fig. 80. on page 206.

This unit adapts the levels refering to the L–IECB, N–IECB, CK–L, CK–N, and OH–BUS buses (accordingto the futurebus standard), made available for possible expansions to come.

2.5.22 Clock external receiverSee Fig. 81. on page 206.

An encoded signal bearing the clock and multiframe synchronism inputs this unit which will provide to splitand buffer them at CMOS levels and then distribute them to the Tributary, Aggregate and Aux units presenton the subrack.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

206

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

1

8

9

15

DATA (LOCAL) V.11 OUT (+)1

DATA (LOCAL) V.11 OUT (–)9

DATA (NETWORK) V.11 OUT (+)2

DATA (NETWORK) V.11 OUT (–)10

CLOCK V.11 OUT (+)3

CLOCK V.11 OUT (–)11

DATA (NETWORK) V.11 IN (+)7

DATA (NETWORK) V.11 IN (–)14

DATA (LOCAL) V.11 IN (+)8

DATA (LOCAL) V.11 IN (–)15

CLOCK V.11 IN (+)6

CLOCK V.11 IN (–)13

GROUND4

GROUND12

SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONPINS

Fig. 80. IECB termination: operative points

CK + SYNC FROM 3+1 SUBRACK (38.88 MHz)1.6/5.6 CONNECTOR

Fig. 81. Clock ext. receiver: operative points

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

207

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

208

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

209

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

3 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

3.1 UNPACKING AND STORAGE

3.1.1 General

This chapter describes the procedure to follow when unpacking the crates used for shipping theequipment.

The reciprocal procedure must be done for repacking, if necessary. In such case it is recommended to usethe original packing material.

3.1.2 Unpacking

The following information should appear on the outer package:

– International symbols

Side up

Keep dry

Fragile

– Trade mark/ address of the manufacturing company

– Labels (or template marks) indicating information on the contract and destination of the product

– An envelope containing a list of the equipment contained in the package, and other documents

Upon receipt check that:

– the final destination of the crates is that indicated on the label

– the packaging is not damaged

Report any shipping damages to the Company’s representative or Forwarding Agent.

Unpacking Procedure

– Check that the package is in the position indicated by the arrows

– Open the case

– Remove the shockproof material

– Remove the equipment from the case

– Remove prepacking, the polyethylene bag and any other protection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

210

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

– Remove the plastic bags, cellotaped to the rack, containing the accessories

– Remove the dehydrating bags

– Check that the equipment is not damaged and that it correspond to those indicated on the packinglist enclosed.

Otherwise, contact the Company’s representative.

N.B. When unpacking it is advisable to handle the packing material with care; it might be reused for repacking again if it must be reshipped.

3.1.3 Storage

If having to store the packed material, the following requirements must be met:

– Cardboard boxes should be kept in a well–aired room indoors

– Timber or plywood cases can be stored outdoors, provided they are protected against rain and directsunlight.

3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Refer to the System Handbook.

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Subrack electrical connections

SAFETY RULES

warning

The subrack must be grounded through a ground protection of the building’s electric system.

– The auxiliary voltage ground reference is equipotential to the protection ground.

– Before powering the equipment connect ground protection. To this concern use a 25 mm2

yellow/green cable and connect it to the pin with symbol:

– If having to disconnect the equipment from ground, switch–off mains.

– Before servicing the subrack disconnect all power supply connections.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

211

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

EMC NORMSATTENTION

– For all connections to the external world, only use cables and connectors of the type specified in thishandbook or those indicated in the installation documentation or those indicated in his own ”Installa-tion Standards” (or similar documents) of the customer. The cables recommended for the stationconnections to the equipment are specified in paragraph 3.4 of the System Handbook.

– Care must be taken in terminating the screened cables

– Use the appropriate closing plugs for the unused connectors, see paragraph 3.4 in the Sys-tem Handbook.

– Ground the equipment using the braid with section and impedance as specified

To electrically connect the equipment proceed as indicated below.

Follow the instructions given below for the electrical connections.A connection area is located on the upper part of the subrack, to be used during the installation phase,see para. 2.2 page 47 .

The following connections are made on the subrack:

a ) ground connections (reference is made to the System Handbook and to the installation documents)b ) power connections (reference is made to the tables below and to para. 2.2 page 47 to locate the pow-

er terminal strips)

c ) connection with other assemblies constituting the system (see System Handbook and Plant Docu-mentation)

d ) connections with the rack distribution frames (if any; see System Handbook and Plant Documenta-tion)

e ) service and alarm connections: reference is made to the following tables, to para. 2.2 page 47 to lo-cate the subrack terminal strips, and to the installation documentation.

Reference is made to Chapter 3 in the System Handbook for further information on the connectors andon the internal and external connections.

The installation tables of the subrack (1+1, 3+1 and up to 7+1 versions) are given in the following pages.The tables refer to:

– services– alarms– power supply.

The diagrams are also provided, to be used to connect the electrical switches and the units by using thecables supplied with the ”1+1 subrack connections” (P/N 299.702.281 Y) for the 1+1 version (seeFig. 82. page 222) and with the ”3+1 subrack connections” (P/N 299.702.282 Z) for the 3+1 version (see Fig. 83. page 231) and with the ”RSA expansion subrack connections” (P/N 299.702.156 S) for the expan-sion subrack (see Fig. 84. page 236).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

212

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

3.3.2 1+1 configuration installation

Tab. 24. Services installation (1+1 version)

SERVICES INSTALLATION

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M61 – 2aM61 – 3a

D64Rx+_1D64Rx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (G.703)

M61 – 2cM61 – 3c

D64Tx+_1D64Tx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (G.703)

M61 – 10aM61 – 11a

D64Rx+_2D64Rx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (G.703)

M61 – 10cM61 – 11c

D64Tx+_2D64Tx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (G.703)

M61 – 18aM61 – 19a

D64Rx+_3D64Rx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (G.703)

M61 – 18cM61 – 19c

D64Tx+_3D64Tx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (G.703)

M61 – 26aM61 – 27a

V11Rx1+V11Rx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (V.11)

M61 – 28aM61 – 29a

V11Tx1+V11Tx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (V.11)

M61 – 30aM61 – 31a

V11Rx2+V11Rx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (V.11)

M61 – 32aM61 – 32b

V11Tx2+V11Tx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (V.11)

M61 – 31bM61 – 30b

V11Rx3+V11Rx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (V.11)AUX 1

M61 – 29bM61 – 28b

V11Tx3+V11Tx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (V.11)

M61 – 27bM61 – 26b

CK64Tx+CK64Tx–

64 kHz clock Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M61 – 26cM61 – 27c

CK64Rx+CK64Rx–

64 kHz clock Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M61 – 28cM61 – 29c

SY8Tx+SY8Tx–

8 kHz sync. Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M61 – 30cM61 – 31c

SY8Rx+SY8Rx–

8 kHz sync. Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M62 – 10b – 10aM62 – 11b – 11a

PLC RxPLC Rx *

Speech party line, Rx side – path “C”

M62 – 14b – 14aM62 – 15b – 15a

PLC TxPLC Tx *

Speech party line, Tx side – path “C”

M62 – 2bM62 – 3b

PLB TxPLB Tx *

Speech party line, Tx side – path “B”

M62 – 6bM62 – 7b

PLB RxPLB Rx *

Speech party line, Rx side – path “B”

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

213

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 25. Additional housekeeping (1+1 version)

ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING

Tagblock/Pin Acronym ECT number Description Unit

M63 – 10a ALM 1 OUT out 4 output 1

M63 – 11a ALM 4 OUT out 7 output 4

M63 – 12a ALM 7 OUT out 10 output 7

M63 – 10b ALM 2 OUT out 5 output 2

M63 – 11b ALM 5 OUT out 8 output 5

M63 – 12b ALM 8 OUT out 11 output 8

M63 – 14b COM 8 IN in 16 input 8 DriverM63 – 16b COM 2 IN in 10 input 2

DriverForcing

M63 – 10c ALM 3 OUT out 16 output 3

M63 – 11c ALM 6 OUT out 9 output 6

M63 – 14c COM 7 IN in 15 input 7

M63 – 16c COM 1 IN in 9 input 1

M63 – 12c GROUND

M63 – 13a GROUND

Tab. 26. B2 byte monitor (1+1 version)

B2 BYTE MONITOR

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M62 – 22a B2LI1

M62 – 23a B2LI1*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 1

M62 – 24a B2RA1

M62 – 24b B2RA1*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 1

RRA unitM62 – 18a B2LI0

RRA unit

M62 – 19a B2LI0*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 0

M62 – 20a B2RA0

M62 – 21a B2RA0*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 0

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

214

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 27. Party line paths of USK unit and data channels for data USK units (Nx1200 or Nx2400 multi-rate) (1+1 version)

USK

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M64 – 2b BCA PLA RX or DRX G.703

M64 – 3b BCA PLA RX* or DRX G.703*Rx side (Analog or Digital)

M64 – 4b BCA MA Tx signalling Party LineM64 – 5b BCA EA Rx signalling

Party Linepath A

M64 – 6b BCA PLA TX or DTX G.703

M64 – 7b BCA PLA TX* or DTX G.703Tx side (Analog or Digital)

M64 – 10b BCA PLB TX

M64 – 11b BCA PLB TX*Tx side

M64 – 12b BCA EB Rx signalling Party LineM64 – 13b BCA MB Tx signalling

Party Linepath B

M64 – 14b BCA PLB RX

M64 – 15b BCA PLB RX*Rx side USK

M64 – 18b BCA PLC RX

M64 – 19b BCA PLC RX*Rx side

M64 – 20b BCA MC Tx signalling Party LineM64 – 21b BCA EC Rx signalling

Party Linepath B

M64 – 22b BCA PLC TX

M64 – 23b BCA PLC TX*Tx side

M63 – 18a BCA PLA or TX_DTX G.703 Path A party line (Analog or Digital)

M63 – 19a BCA PLA or TX_DTX G.703* Tx side (NB 1)

M63 – 18c BCA PLA or RX_DRX G.703 Path A party line (Analog or Digital)

M63 – 19c BCA PLA or RX_DRX G.703* Rx side (NB 1)

M64 – 24a BCA TEL EXT A External telephone, wire A

M64 – 24c BCA TEL EXT B External telephone, wire B

M64 – 26a DATO 1 Rx Channel 1, Rx side

M64 – 27a DATO 1 Tx Channel 1, Tx side

M64 – 28a DATO 2 Rx Channel 2, Rx side

M64 – 29a DATO 2 Tx Channel 2, Tx side

M64 – 30a DATO 3 Rx Channel 3, Rx side

M64 – 31a DATO 3 Tx Channel 3, Tx side USKM64 – 32a DATO 4 Rx Channel 4, Rx side

USK(NB2)

M64 – 32c DATO 4 Tx Channel 4, Tx side

M64 – 26b DATO 7 Tx Channel 7, Tx side

M64 – 27b DATO 7 Rx Channel 7, Rx side

M64 – 28b DATO 6 Tx Channel 6, Tx side

M64 – 29b DATO 6 Rx Channel 6, Rx side

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

215

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M64 – 30b DATO 5 Tx Channel 5, Tx side

M64 – 31b DATO 5 Rx Channel 5, Rx side USKM64 – 26c DATO 8 Rx Channel 8, Rx side

USK(NB2)

M64 – 27c DATO 8 Tx Channel 8, Tx side

NOTE:

1 ) This path in only used in 1+1 double terminal configuration.

2 ) These connections refer only to these two USK units: Nx1200 baud terminal data unit or Nx2400baud terminal multirate data unit.

Tab. 28. Tx power and Rx power recording (1+1 version)

Recordings

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M68 – 2a PRX_REC_0 Rx field strength, receiver 0

M68 – 4a PRX_REC_1 Rx field strength, receiver 1 SPLM68 – 3b PTX_REC_0 Tx power, transmitter 0

SPL

M68 – 5b PTX_REC_1 Tx power, transmitter 1

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

216

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 29. Equipment remote alarms (1+1 version)

EQUIPMENT REMOTE ALARMS

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M54 – 1 R OR alarm (office signalling)

M54 – 3 URG OR urgent alarm

M54 – 2 NURG OR not urgent alarm

M54 – 4 EXT OR external alarm

M54 – 5 INT OR internal alarm

M54 – 6 IND OR indication alarm

M54 – 7 LOS Q3 Connection missing on Q3 interface

M54 – 14 TORC OR secondary power supply missingEqpt. Control.

M54 – 15 TANC AND secondary power supply missing

M54 – 10 ABN Abnormal condition

M54 – 11 OR TRIB OR LOS on Tributary

M54 – 13 TUP EC alarm

M54 – 8 TOR OR primary power supply missing

M54 – 9 TAND AND primary power supply missing

Tab. 30. Housekeeping provided by the Equipment Controller (1+1 version)

I/O HOUSEKEEPING

Tagblock/Pin Acronym ECT number Description Unit

M55 – 1 TC1 IN1 input 1

M55 – 2 TC2 IN2 input 2

M55 – 3 TC2 IN3 input 3

M55 – 4 TC4 IN4 input 4

M55 – 5 TC5 IN5 input 5

M55 – 6 TC6 IN6 input 6 Eqpt. Control.

M55 – 7 TC7 IN7 input 7

M55 – 8 TC8 IN8 input 8

M55 – 9 TS1 OUT1 output 1

M55 – 10 TS2 OUT2 output 2

M55 – 11 TS3 OUT3 output 3

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

217

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 31. Primary power supply (1+1 version)

PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description

M58 – 1 BATT1+ Station battery 1 (positive) connected to GND

M58 – 2 GND Ground

M58 – 3 BATT1– Station battery 1 (negative)

M59 – 1 BATT2+ Station battery 2 (positive) connected to GND

M59 – 2 GND Ground

M59 – 3 BATT2– Station battery 2 (negative)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

218

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 32. Alarms/Remote alarms installation for parallel supervision (1+1 version)

ALARMS AND REMOTE ALARMS FOR PARALLEL SUPERVISION

ACRONYM Description Pin

GEN ALM General alarm 13b

GEN OPMAN General manual operation in progress 13c

GEN OPREM General remote operation in progress 14a

MODEM

MOD ALM0 Modulator alarm 14b

MOD ALM1 14c

DEM ALM0 Demodulator alarm (including XPIC) 15a

DEM ALM1 15b

HBER ALM0 High BER alarm 15c

HBER ALM1 16a

SPV env.ALM (in B.B. ext.subrack) 16b

PSU0 or PSU1 ALM 16c

EWH ALM0 High Early Warning alarm 29a

EWH ALM1 28a

PSMD ALM0 Power supply modem alarm 27a

PSMD ALM1 18a

RRA0 SEL RRA 0 selected 18b

RRA1 SEL RRA 1 selected 18c

TRANSCEIVER

TX ALM0 Tx alarm 19a

TX ALM1 19b

RX ALM0 Rx alarm 19c

RX ALM1 20a

DIVITY ALM0 DIVITY alarm (if present) 20b

DIVITY ALM1 20c

RT OPMAN Tx, Rx manual operation 21a

PSRT ALM0 RT power supply alarm 21b

PSRT ALM1 21c

RT SER ALM0 Alarm serializer Unit 22a

RT SER ALM1 22b

TX SEL0 Tx selection (HST only) 22c

TX SEL1 23a

TEMP/FAN ALM0 FAN alarm 23b

TEMP/FAN ALM1 23c

AUTOMATIC PROTECTION SWITCHING

SW or ATPC ALM SWC or ATPC Unit alarm 24a

HSW ALM HSW alarm 24b

HSW OPMAN HSW manual operation 24c

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

219

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

ACRONYM PinDescription

CH0 SEL Selection CH0 32a

CH1 SEL Selection CH1 31a

DF ALM DF Unit alarm 30a

CRU 0 SEL CRU 0 selected 26a

VF ALM VF Unit alarm 26b

AUX ALM AUX Unit alarm 26c

HSW OPREM HSW remote operation 27c

AUXILIARY

LWS ALM/SYNC ALM SYNC Unit alarm 28c

RADIO SECTION ADAPTATION

CRU ALM0/SERVICE ALM CRU Unit alarm 29c

CRU ALM1 30c

RRA ALM0 RRA Units alarm 31c

RRA ALM1 32c

CRU 1 SEL CRU 1 selected 13a

FORCE CH0 RX Rx forcing on HST 2a

FORCE CH1 RX 2c

FORCE CH0 TX Tx forcing on HST 3c

FORCE CH1 TX 4c

FORCE USK0Forcing on stackable Unit of additional sub-rack (future function)

5c

FORCE USK1 Forcing on stackable (future function) 6c

FORCE CRU0 Syncr. source forcing 7c

FORCE CRU1 7b

FORCE RRA0 Forcing RRA Units 7a

FORCE RRA1 8c

FORCE LSW0 Forcing Low Frequency Switch 8b

FORCE LSW1 8a

SIMUL EFF0 Efficient simulation 3a

SIMUL EFF1 4a

SIMUL EWL0 Low Early Warning simulation 5a

SIMUL EWL1 10c

SIMUL HBER0 High BER simulation 10b

SIMUL HBER1 10a

SIMUL FAIL0 Failure simulation on CH 11c

SIMUL FAIL1 11b

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

220

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 33. Additional housekeeping provided by I/O Extension (1+1 version)

ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING

Additional Housekeep. number ECT Tagblock/Pin

AL 47 OUT13 13b

AL 46 OUT14 13c

AL 45 OUT15 14a

AL 44 OUT16 14b

AL 43 OUT17 14c

AL 42 OUT18 15a

AL 41 OUT19 15b

AL 40 OUT20 15c

AL 39 OUT21 16a

AL 38 OUT22 16b

AL 37 OUT23 16c

AL 36 OUT52 29a

AL 35 OUT50 28a

AL 34 OUT48 27a

AL 33 OUT24 18a

AL 32 OUT25 18b

AL 31 OUT26 18c

AL 30 OUT27 19a

AL 29 OUT28 19b

AL 28 OUT29 19c

AL 27 OUT30 20a

AL 26 OUT31 20b

AL 25 OUT32 20c

AL 24 OUT33 21a

AL 23 OUT34 21b

AL 22 OUT35 21c

AL 21 OUT36 22a

AL 20 OUT37 22b

AL 19 OUT38 22c

AL 18 OUT39 23a

AL 17 OUT40 23b

AL 16 OUT41 23c

AL 15 OUT42 24a

AL 14 OUT43 24b

AL 13 OUT44 24c

AL 12 OUT58 32a

AL 11 OUT56 31a

AL 10 OUT54 30a

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

221

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Additional Housekeep. Tagblock/Pinnumber ECT

AL 9 OUT45 26a

AL 8 OUT46 26b

AL 7 OUT47 26c

AL 6 OUT49 27c

AL 5 OUT51 28c

AL 4 OUT53 29c

AL 3 OUT55 30c

AL 2 OUT57 31c

AL 1 OUT59 32c

AL 48 OUT12 13a

TLC 01 IN39 2a

TLC 02 IN40 2c

TLC 03 IN38 3c

TLC 04 IN36 4c

TLC 05 IN34 5c

TLC 06 IN32 6c

TLC 07 IN31 7c

TLC 08 IN30 7b

TLC 09 IN29 7a

TLC 10 IN28 8c

TLC 11 IN27 8b

TLC 12 IN26 8a

TLC 13 IN37 3a

TLC 14 IN35 4a

TLC 15 IN33 5a

TLC 16 IN25 10c

TLC 17 IN24 10b

TLC 18 IN23 10a

TLC 19 IN22 11c

TLC 20 IN21 11b

TLC 21 IN20 11a

TLC 22 IN19 12c

TLC 23 IN18 12b

TLC 24 IN17 12a

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

222

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

J1

J6

J5

J4

J3

J2

J1

J1

J6

J5

J4

J3

J2

P7

J2

J1

P1 P3

J2

J3

J4

J1

J2

J3

J4

UNIT CONN.

ELECT. SWITCH J1

POS.

B

ELECT. SWITCH J2B

ELECT. SWITCH J3B

ELECT. SWITCH J4B

ELECT. SWITCH J5B

ELECT. SWITCH J6B

ELECT. SWITCH J3A

ELECT. SWITCH J4A

ELECT. SWITCH J5A

ELECT. SWITCH J6A

UNIT CONN.

HITLES SWITCH J1

POS.

HITLES SWITCH J2

O/E SUB. 0 J4P1

O/E SUB. 1 J4P3

O/E SUB. 0 J3P1

O/E SUB. 1 J3P3

O/E SUB. 0 J1P1

O/E SUB. 1 J1P3

O/E SUB. 0 J2P1

O/E SUB. 1 J2P3

P7

P7

A B

Fig. 82. Assembly with electrical interface (1+1 version): internal connection cable kit

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

223

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

3.3.3 3+1 configuration installation

Tab. 34. Services installation (AUX unit 1) (3+1 version)

SERVICES INSTALLATION

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M61 – 2aM61 – 3a

D64Rx+_1D64Rx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (G.703)

M61 – 2cM61 – 3c

D64Tx+_1D64Tx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (G.703)

M61 – 10aM61 – 11a

D64Rx+_2D64Rx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (G.703)

M61 – 10cM61 – 11c

D64Tx+_2D64Tx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (G.703)

M61 – 18aM61 – 19a

D64Rx+_3D64Rx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (G.703)

M61 – 18cM61 – 19c

D64Tx+_3D64Tx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (G.703)

M61 – 26aM61 – 27a

V11Rx1+V11Rx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (V.11)

M61 – 28aM61 – 29a

V11Tx1+V11Tx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (V.11)

M61 – 30aM61 – 31a

V11Rx2+V11Rx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (V.11)

M61 – 32aM61 – 32b

V11Tx2+V11Tx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (V.11)

M61 – 31bM61 – 30b

V11Rx3+V11Rx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (V.11)AUX 1

M61 – 29bM61 – 28b

V11Tx3+V11Tx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (V.11)

M61 – 27bM61 – 26b

CK64Tx+CK64Tx–

64 kHz clock Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M61 – 26cM61 – 27c

CK64Rx+CK64Rx–

64 kHz clock Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M61 – 28cM61 – 29c

SY8Tx+SY8Tx–

8 kHz sync. Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M61 – 30cM61 – 31c

SY8Rx+SY8Rx–

8 kHz sync. Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M62 – 10b – 10aM62 – 11b – 11a

PLC RxPLC Rx *

Speech party line, Rx side – path “C”

M62 – 14b – 14aM62 – 15b – 15a

PLC TxPLC Tx *

Speech party line, Tx side – path “C”

M62 – 2bM62 – 3b

PLB TxPLB Tx *

Speech party line, Tx side – path “B”

M62 – 6bM62 – 7b

PLB RxPLB Rx *

Speech party line, Rx side – path “B”

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

224

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 35. Services installation (AUX unit 2) (3+1 version)

SERVICES INSTALLATION

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M65 – 2aM65 – 3a

D64Rx+_1D64Rx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (G.703)

M65 – 2cM65 – 3c

D64Tx+_1D64Tx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (G.703)

M65 – 10aM65 – 11a

D64Rx+_2D64Rx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (G.703)

M65 – 10cM65 – 11c

D64Tx+_2D64Tx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (G.703)

M65 – 18aM65 – 19a

D64Rx+_3D64Rx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (G.703)

M65 – 18cM65 – 19c

D64Tx+_3D64Tx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (G.703)

M65 – 26aM65 – 27a

V11Rx1+V11Rx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (V.11)

M65 – 28aM65 – 29a

V11Tx1+V11Tx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (V.11)

M65 – 30aM65 – 31a

V11Rx2+V11Rx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (V.11)AUX 2

M65 – 32aM65 – 32a

V11Tx2+V11Tx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (V.11)

M65 – 31bM65 – 30b

V11Rx3+V11Rx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (V.11)

M65 – 29bM65 – 28b

V11Tx3+V11Tx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (V.11)

M65 – 27bM65 – 27a

CK64Tx+CK64Tx–

64 kHz clock Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M65 – 26cM65 – 27c

CK64Rx+CK64Rx–

64 kHz clock Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M65 – 28cM65 – 29c

SY8Tx+SY8Tx–

8 kHz sync. Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M65 – 30cM65 – 31c

SY8Rx+SY8Rx–

8 kHz sync. Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M66 – 18bM66 – 18c

PLB RxPLB Rx *

Speech party line, Rx side – path “B”

M66 – 22bM66 – 23b

PLB TxPLB Tx *

Speech party line, Tx side – path “B”

M66 – 26bM66 – 27b

PLC TxPLC Tx *

Speech party line, Tx side – path “C”AUX 2

M66 – 30bM66 – 31b

PLC RxPLC Rx *

Speech party line, Rx side – path “C”

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

225

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 36. B2 byte monitor (3+1 version)

B2 BYTE MONITOR

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M62 – 19b B2LI3

M62 – 18b B2LI3*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 3

M62 – 18c B2RA3

M62 – 19c B2RA3*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 3

M62 – 23b B2LI2

M62 – 22b B2LI2*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 2

M62 – 21b B2RA2

M62 – 20b B2RA2*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 2

M62 – 22a B2LI1RRA unit

M62 – 23a B2LI1*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 1

M62 – 24a B2RA1

M62 – 24b B2RA1*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 1

M62 – 18a B2LI0

M62 – 19a B2LI0*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 0

M62 – 20a B2RA0

M62 – 21a B2RA0*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 0

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

226

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 37. Alarms and remote alarms for parallel supervision provided by Driver Forcing(3+1 version)

ALARMS AND REMOTE ALARMS FOR PARALLEL SUPERVISION

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Signal

M63/2 – 1a RRA0 alm RRA+OPT_0 Unit alm ALM1 OUT

M63/2 – 2a RRA3 alm RRA+OPT_3 Unit alm ALM2 OUT

M63/2 – 1c RRA2 alm RRA+OPT_2 Unit alm ALM3 OUT

M63/2 – 1b RRA1 alm RRA+OPT_1 Unit alm ALM4 OUT

M63/2 – 2b CRU0 alm CRU_0/Unit servizi alm ALM5 OUT

M63/2 – 3a AUX alm Unit AUX alm (AUX1 alm + AUX2 alm in RRA) ALM7 OUT

M63/2 – 3b GEN alm GENERAL alm ALM8 OUT

M63/2 – 3c GND

M63/2 – 5a GND

M63/2 – 5b not used COM8 IN

M63/2 – 5c not used COM7 IN

M63/2 – 6a not used COM6 IN

M63/2 – 6b Force RRA3 Force RRA_3 protection COM5 IN

M63/2 – 6c Force RRA2 Force RRA_2 protection COM4 IN

M63/2 – 7a Force RRA1 Force RRA_1 protection COM3 IN

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

227

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 38. Equipment remote alarms (3+1 version)

EQUIPMENT REMOTE ALARMS

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M54 – 1 R OR alarm (office signalling)

M54 – 3 URG OR urgent alarm

M54 – 2 NURG OR not urgent alarm

M54 – 4 EXT OR external alarm

M54 – 5 INT OR internal alarm

M54 – 6 IND OR indication alarm

M54 – 7 LOS Q3 Connection missing on Q3 interface

M54 – 14 TORC OR secondary power supply missingEqpt. Control.

M54 – 15 TANC AND secondary power supply missing

M54 – 10 ABN Abnormal condition

M54 – 11 OR TRIB OR LOS on Tributary

M54 – 13 TUP EC alarm

M54 – 8 TOR OR primary power supply missing

M54 – 9 TAND AND primary power supply missing

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

228

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 39. Housekeeping provided by the Equipment Controller (3+1 version)

HOUSEKEEPING

Acronym ECT number Description Unit

M55 – 1 TC1 IN1 input 1

M55 – 2 TC2 IN2 input 2

M55 – 3 TC2 IN3 input 3

M55 – 4 TC4 IN4 input 4

M55 – 5 TC5 IN5 input 5

M55 – 6 TC6 IN6 input 6 Eqpt. Control.

M55 – 7 TC7 IN7 input 7

M55 – 8 TC8 IN8 input 8

M55 – 9 TS1 OUT1 output 1

M55 – 10 TS2 OUT2 output 2

M55 – 11 TS3 OUT3 output 3

Tab. 40. Primary power supply (3+1 version)

PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description

M58 – 1 BATT1+ Station battery 1 (positive) connected to GND

M58 – 2 GND Ground

M58 – 3 BATT1– Station battery 1 (negative)

M59 – 1 BATT2+ Station battery 2 (positive) connected to GND

M59 – 2 GND Ground

M59 – 3 BATT2– Station battery 2 (negative)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

229

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 41. Additional housekeeping provided by I/O Extension (3+1 version)

ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING

Additional Housekeep. ECT number Tagblock/Pin

AL 47 OUT13 13b

AL 46 OUT14 13c

AL 45 OUT15 14a

AL 44 OUT16 14b

AL 43 OUT17 14c

AL 42 OUT18 15a

AL 41 OUT19 15b

AL 40 OUT20 15c

AL 39 OUT21 16a

AL 38 OUT22 16b

AL 37 OUT23 16c

AL 36 OUT52 29a

AL 35 OUT50 28a

AL 34 OUT48 27a

AL 33 OUT24 18a

AL 32 OUT25 18b

AL 31 OUT26 18c

AL 30 OUT27 19a

AL 29 OUT28 19b

AL 28 OUT29 19c

AL 27 OUT30 20a

AL 26 OUT31 20b

AL 25 OUT32 20c

AL 24 OUT33 21a

AL 23 OUT34 21b

AL 22 OUT35 21c

AL 21 OUT36 22a

AL 20 OUT37 22b

AL 19 OUT38 22c

AL 18 OUT39 23a

AL 17 OUT40 23b

AL 16 OUT41 23c

AL 15 OUT42 24a

AL 14 OUT43 24b

AL 13 OUT44 24c

AL 12 OUT58 32a

AL 11 OUT56 31a

AL 10 OUT54 30a

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

230

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Additional Housekeep. Tagblock/PinECT number

AL 9 OUT45 26a

AL 8 OUT46 26b

AL 7 OUT47 26c

AL 6 OUT49 27c

AL 5 OUT51 28c

AL 4 OUT53 29c

AL 3 OUT55 30c

AL 2 OUT57 31c

AL 1 OUT59 32c

AL 48 OUT12 13a

TLC 01 IN39 2a

TLC 02 IN40 2c

TLC 03 IN38 3c

TLC 04 IN36 4c

TLC 05 IN34 5c

TLC 06 IN32 6c

TLC 07 IN31 7c

TLC 08 IN30 7b

TLC 09 IN29 7a

TLC 10 IN28 8c

TLC 11 IN27 8b

TLC 12 IN26 8a

TLC 13 IN37 3a

TLC 14 IN35 4a

TLC 15 IN33 5a

TLC 16 IN25 10c

TLC 17 IN24 10b

TLC 18 IN23 10a

TLC 19 IN22 11c

TLC 20 IN21 11b

TLC 21 IN20 11a

TLC 22 IN19 12c

TLC 23 IN18 12b

TLC 24 IN17 12a

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

231

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

J5

J1

J2

P6 P8

A

TXA

J6

J7

J8

J1

B

RXA

J2

J3

J5

J5

C

TXB

J6

J7

J8

J1

D

RXB

J2

J3

J5

UNIT CONN.

O/E SUB. 1 J1

POS.

P3

O/E SUB. 2 J1P6

O/E SUB. 3 J1P8

O/E SUB. 0 J1P1

O/E SUB. 1 J2P3

O/E SUB. 2 J2P6

O/E SUB. 3 J2P8

O/E SUB. 0 J2P1

O/E SUB. 1 J3P3

O/E SUB. 2 J3P6

O/E SUB. 3 J3P8

O/E SUB. 0 J3P1

O/E SUB. 1 J4P3

O/E SUB. 2 J4P6

O/E SUB. 3 J4P8

O/E SUB. 0 J4P1

UNIT CONN.

SWITCH RRA TX J5

POS.

A

SWITCH RRA TX J6A

SWITCH RRA TX J7A

SWITCH RRA TX J8A

SWITCH RRA RX J1D

SWITCH RRA RX J2D

SWITCH RRA RX J3D

SWITCH RRA RX J5D

SWITCH RRA RX J1B

SWITCH RRA RX J2B

SWITCH RRA RX J3B

SWITCH RRA RX J5B

SWITCH RRA TX J5C

SWITCH RRA TX J6C

SWITCH RRA TX J7C

SWITCH RRA TX J8C

J3

J4

J1

J2

J3

J4

J1

J2

J3

J4

J1

J2

J3

J4

Fig. 83. Assembly with electrical interface (3+1 version): internal connection cable kit

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

232

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

3.3.4 Up to 7+1 configuration installation

Tab. 42. Service installation (AUX unit 1) (7+1 version)

SERVICES INSTALLATION

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M5 – 2aM5 – 3a

D64Rx+_1D64Rx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (G.703)

M5 – 4aM5 – 5a

D64Tx+_1D64Tx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (G.703)

M5 – 6aM5 – 7a

D64Rx+_2D64Rx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (G.703)

M5 – 8aM5 – 8b

D64Tx+_2D64Tx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (G.703)

M5 – 7bM5 – 6b

D64Rx+_3D64Rx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (G.703)

M5 – 5bM5 – 4b

D64Tx+_3D64Tx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (G.703)

M5 – 10aM5 – 11a

V11Rx1+V11Rx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (V.11)

M5 – 12aM5 – 13a

V11Tx1+V11Tx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (V.11)

M5 – 14aM5 – 15a

V11Rx2+V11Rx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (V.11)

M5 – 16aM5 – 16b

V11Tx2+V11Tx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (V.11)AUX 1

M5 – 15bM5 – 14b

V11Rx3+V11Rx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (V.11)

M5 – 13bM5 – 12b

V11Tx3+V11Tx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (V.11)

M5 – 11bM5 – 10a

CK64Tx+CK64Tx–

64 kHz clock Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M5 – 10cM5 – 11c

CK64Rx+CK64Rx–

64 kHz clock Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M5 – 3bM5 – 2b

SY8Tx+SY8Tx–

8 kHz sync. Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M5 – 2cM5 – 3c

SY8Rx+SY8Rx–

8 kHz sync. Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M5 – 26aM5 – 27a

PLC RxPLC Rx *

Speech party line, Rx side – path “C”

M5 – 30aM5 – 31a

PLC TxPLC Tx *

Speech party line, Tx side – path “C”

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

233

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 43. Service installation (AUX unit 2) (7+1 version)

SERVICES INSTALLATION

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M6 – 2aM6 – 3a

D64Rx+_1D64Rx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (G.703)

M6 – 4aM6 – 5a

D64Tx+_1D64Tx–_1

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (G.703)

M6 – 6aM6 – 7a

D64Rx+_2D64Rx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (G.703)

M6 – 8aM6 – 8b

D64Tx+_2D64Tx–_2

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (G.703)

M6 – 7bM6 – 6b

D64Rx+_3D64Rx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (G.703)

M6 – 5bM6 – 4b

D64Tx+_3D64Tx–_3

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (G.703)

M6 – 10aM6 – 11a

V11Rx1+V11Rx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Rx output (V.11)

M6 – 12aM6 – 13a

V11Tx1+V11Tx1–

64 kbit/s channel “1” Tx input (V.11)

M6 – 14aM6 – 15a

V11Rx2+V11Rx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Rx output (V.11)

M6 – 16aM6 – 16b

V11Tx2+V11Tx2–

64 kbit/s channel “2” Tx input (V.11)AUX 2

M6 – 15bM6 – 14b

V11Rx3+V11Rx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Rx output (V.11)

M6 – 13bM6 – 12b

V11Tx3+V11Tx3–

64 kbit/s channel “3” Tx input (V.11)

M6 – 11bM6 – 10a

CK64Tx+CK64Tx–

64 kHz clock Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M6 – 10cM6 – 11c

CK64Rx+CK64Rx–

64 kHz clock Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M6 – 3bM6 – 2b

SY8Tx+SY8Tx–

8 kHz sync. Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M6 – 2cM6 – 3c

SY8Rx+SY8Rx–

8 kHz sync. Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)

M6 – 26aM6 – 27a

PLC RxPLC Rx *

Speech party line, Rx side – path “C”

M6 – 30aM6 – 31a

PLC TxPLC Tx *

Speech party line, Tx side – path “C”

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

234

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 44. B2 byte monitor (7+1 version)

B2 BYTE MONITOR

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description Unit

M7 – 10a B2LI4

M7 – 11a B2LI4*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 4

M7 – 12a B2RA4

M7 – 13a B2RA4*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 4

M7 – 14a B2LI5

M7 – 15a B2LI5*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 5

M7 – 16a B2RA5

M7 – 16b B2RA5*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 5

M7 – 15b B2LI6

M7 – 14b B2LI6*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 6

M7 – 13b B2RA6RRA Unit

M7 – 12b B2RA6*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 6

M7 – 11b B2LI7

M7 – 10b B2LI7*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 7

M7 – 10c B2RA7

M7 – 11c B2RA7*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 7

M7 – 13c B2LISP

M7 – 12c B2LISO*Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA spare

M7 – 15c B2RASP

M7 – 14c B2RASP*Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA spare

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

235

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 45. Additional housekeeping or alarm provided by the Driver Forcing (7+1 version)

ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING OR ALARMS

Tagblock/Pin Alarm name Alarm meaning ECT number Signal

M7/4–1a RRA spare alm RRA+OPT_spare unit alm OUT107 ALM1 OUT

M7/4–1b RRA7 alm RRA+OPT_7 unit alm OUT108 ALM2 OUT

M7/4–1c RRA6 alm RRA+OPT_6 unit alm OUT109 ALM3 OUT

M7/4–2a RRA5 alm RRA+OPT_5 unit alm OUT110 ALM4 OUT

M7/4–2b RRA4 alm RRA+OPT_4 unit alm OUT111 ALM5 OUT

M7/4–2c not used not used OUT112 ALM6 OUT

M7/4–3a AUX almAUX unit alm (AUX1 alm +

AUX2 alm in RRA)OUT113 ALM7 OUT

M7/4–3b GEN alm GENERAL alm OUT114 ALM8 OUT

M7/4–3c GND

M7/4–5a GND

M7/4–5b not used IN70 COM8 IN

M7/4–5c not used IN69 COM7 IN

M7/4–6a not used IN68 COM6 IN

M7/4–6b Force RRA7 Force RRA_7 prot. IN67 COM5 IN

M7/4–6c Force RRA6 Force RRA_6 prot. IN66 COM4 IN

M7/4–7a Force RRA5 Force RRA_5 prot. IN65 COM3 IN

M7/4–7b Force RRA4 Force RRA_4 prot. IN64 COM2 IN

M7/4–7c not used not used IN63 COM1 IN

Tab. 46. Primary power supply (7+1 version)

PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY

Tagblock/Pin Acronym Description

M16 – 1 BATT1+ Station battery 1 (positive) connected to GND

M16 – 2 GND Ground

M16 – 3 BATT1– Station battery 1 (negative)

M17 – 1 BATT2+ Station battery 2 (positive) connected to GND

M17 – 2 GND Ground

M17 – 3 BATT2– Station battery 2 (negative)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

236

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

J5

J1

J2

P6 P8

A

TXA

J6

J7

J8

J1

B

RXA

J2

J3

J5

J5

C

TXB

J6

J7

J8

J1

D

RXB

J2

J3

J5

UNIT CONN.

O/E SUB. 4 J1

POS.

P2

O/E SUB. 5 J1P4

O/E SUB. 6 J1P6

O/E SUB. 7 J1P8

O/E SUB. 4 J2P2

O/E SUB. 5 J2P4

O/E SUB. 6 J2P6

O/E SUB. 7 J2P8

O/E SUB. 4 J3P2

O/E SUB. 5 J3P4

O/E SUB. 6 J3P6

O/E SUB. 7 J3P8

O/E SUB. 4 J4P2

O/E SUB. 5 J4P4

O/E SUB. 6 J4P6

O/E SUB. 7 J4P8

UNIT CONN.

SWITCH RRA TX J5

POS.

A

SWITCH RRA TX J6A

SWITCH RRA TX J7A

SWITCH RRA TX J9A

SWITCH RRA RX J1D

SWITCH RRA RX J2D

SWITCH RRA RX J3D

SWITCH RRA RX J4D

SWITCH RRA RX J1B

SWITCH RRA RX J2B

SWITCH RRA RX J3B

SWITCH RRA RX J4B

SWITCH RRA TX J5C

SWITCH RRA TX J6C

SWITCH RRA TX J7C

SWITCH RRA TX J9C

J3

J4

J1

J2

J3

J4

J1

J2

J3

J4

J1

J2

J3

J4

P2 P4

Fig. 84. Assembly with electrical interface (3+1 version): internal connection cable kit

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

237

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

3.4 COMMISSIONING

Refer to:

Para. 2.2 “COMPOSITION” on page 47 in this Handbook.

Para. 2.5 “UNIT DESCRIPTION” on page 114 in this Handbook.

Para. 3.4 “COMMISSIONING” in the System Handbook.

3.4.1 Preliminary operation

This paragraph describes the presettings to be made on the modules/units as a function of the installationrequirements.

Hardware settings

WARNING EMC SPECIFICATION

– Insert the specified presettings on the electrical units to ensure the EMC performances.

– Check that the equipment operates with all screens correctly in place (front cover plate, ESD protec-tions for connectors, etc.).

– Follow the information that guides to the correct use of the equipment with respect to the EMC re-quirements.

Reference is made to the documents MSZZQ attached to Chapter 6 ”HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMEN-TATION” at page 249 to perform these presettings.

This chapter comprises, for every presettable unit/sub–unit:

– the layout drawings, which show the exact positions of all presetting facilities;

– the sheets comprising the tables that provide the relationship between the obtainable functions andthe presettings to be made.

This chapter also comprises a document showing the ON positions of the microswitches.

The table providing the list of the presettable units/subunits, along with the information to locate them, canbe found in para. 2.5 ”UNIT DESCRIPTION” on page 114 .

Software settings

Reference is made to the handbook that describes the operating software (Operator Handbook) to performthese settings.

3.4.2 Power–up

After having verified and carried out all the installation and commissioning operations described onChapter 3 page 209 in the Handbook and on Chapter 3 in the System’s Handbook, activate the PowerSupply unit (slot P13 and slot P14) by setting all the switches to the ON position.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

238

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Check that the green LEDs on the unit’s front coverplate are ON. At this point start checking to verify thatthe system is operating properly (refer to Chapter 3 in the System’s Handbook and the Operator’sHandbook).

3.4.3 Check and measurement procedure

Refer to Chapter 3 in the System’s Handbook and the Operator’s Handbook.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

239

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

MAINTENANCE

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

240

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

241

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

4 GLOBAL OPERATIONS

The alarms and failures are thoroughly analysed in the relevant Craft Terminal Handbook.Refer to para. 2.5 “UNIT DESCRIPTION” page 114 to locate the access points and the visual indicators(LEDs) on each assembly.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

242

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

243

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

5 MAINTENANCE

5.1 DEFINITIONS

5.1.1 Preventive maintenance

Preventive maintenance involves a certain number of operations reducing the risk of equipment failure.These are carried out periodically.

5.1.2 Corrective maintenance

Corrective maintenance involves a minimum number of operations aiming at correcting faulty conditionsin a very short time.

These operations are carried out by the station Operator who merely replaces the subrack or board asinstructed by the manufacturer, without attempting to repair them.

5.1.3 Engineer’s technical qualifications

Equipment maintenance engineers must be familiar with the equipment and its features.

5.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2.1 Periodicity

5.2.1.1 Mechanical checks

– Check that the following have been properly connected:

• power supply units

• coaxial cables

• mounting elements

5.2.1.2 Earthing check

Check that the subrack and modules have been grounded.

5.2.1.3 Electrical checks

– automatic switching

– alarms

The way to check the equipment operations is described in Chapter 4 ”GLOBAL OPERATIONS” page 241.

5.2.1.4 Visual checks

– Check that the LEDs are working properly.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

244

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

5.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Corrective maintenance starts following the activation of a visual alarm indication or when the green LEDson the power supply units switch OFF. As a consequence a red lamp, situated at the top of the rack, lightsup.

In these circumstance the station Operator presses the alarm attend pus–button on the control unit. Thiswill switch off the red rack lamp and light up the yellow lamp.

If in the meantime another alarm condition arises, and the fault has not been repaired yet, the red lampwill light up again.

When the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (attend) or the red lamp will turn OFF i.e., if the alarmhas not been attended and no further alarms have occurred.

The fault location can now take place with the aid of the operator terminal through which the alarms aredisplayed and diagnosed.

The fault location procedures are listed in the “Status of Alarms” procedure in the Operator’sHandbook.

Through them are identified the faulty units of all the system assemblies. Having identified the failurereplace the faulty unit/module with a spare.

WARNING

Before replacing a unit/module be sure that the spare unit/module is preset like the faulty unit/module.

To hardware–set refer to para. 3.4 ”COMMISSIONING” in the relevant assembly Technical Handbook.

The software settings eventually present on the faulty unit are automatically inserted into the replaced unitthrough the Control unit.

If the unit to be replaced is a System Control Unit (Forcing Driver or Equipment Controller), then followthe ”INITIALIZATION” procedure described in the Operator Handbook.

5.4 SPARE PARTS

Refer to para. 2.2 ”COMPOSITION” to page 47 in this handbook.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

245

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

APPENDICES

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

246

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

No Appendices are enclosed in this Handbook

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

247

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

248

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

249

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

6 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION

This section contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/sub–unit hardware setting options.The list of the enclosed documents is given in Tab. 48. on page 252, according to the ANV part number.

TABLE EXPLANATION:

– UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS

Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:

• a dual Part No.:

– Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)

– ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE)

NOTE The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as ’suffix’) stand for a ”feasiblealternative”, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally compat-ible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two letters.For example : the units having P/Ns ”3AL–34065–AAAA” and ”3AL–34065–AABA”are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx docu-ment (described hereafter) 3AL–34065–AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.

• and by a pair of design & production series (change status):

– CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)

– ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)

The following table shows an example of correspondence between ”FACTORY P/N + CS” and”ANV P/N + ICS”

Tab. 47. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’

FACTORY CODE ANV CODE

P/N CS P/N ICS

487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AA AA 01

487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AA AB 01

487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AA AC 01

N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment partlist!In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as theFactory code is concerned, and by the ’suffix + ICS’ if the ANV code is referred to.

Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the unit’s P/Ns and CS–ICS are illustratedin HANDBOOK GUIDE.

– CROSS–REFERENCE

• Id. Unit alphabetical notation. It indicates the unit containing one or more subunits.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

250

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

• App. It reports the unit notation (Id) to which the sub–unit belongs.

The hardware settings can be executed after having checked all the sub–units belonging to a unit,by considering the above cited cross–reference, and by using the presetting documents indicatedin the table and presented in the following point.

– ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS

For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document

”ANV P/N”–MSxxx

is annexed to this handbook (in the case of Documentation on CD-ROM the MSxxx documents maybe given in a CD-ROM different from that containing this Technical Handbook).

The MSxxx documents are enclosed in numerical order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx docu-ment is the highest available on the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled.

Use of the document MSxxx:

• MSxxx means ”document for hardware presetting options” (the MSxxx document’s Part No.is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.

• As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with differentCS–ICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different settingoptions, according to all the possible CSs–ICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning ofdocument (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the correspond-ing ’suffix + ICS’, taking into account that:– a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting op-

tions;– a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;– the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:

• from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)• to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed

– the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lowerthan CS=01).

Each chapter contains:

– one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the set-ting options to make;

– the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.

N.B. IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT

The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Tab. 48. on page 252, whichshows the ’ON’ (closed) position of microswitches.Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only shouldnever be modified.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

251

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

EXAMPLE

N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment partlist!

Taking into account the same unit of Tab. 47. on page 249:

FACTORY CODE ANV CODE

P/N CS P/N ICS

487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01

487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01

487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01

and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but changefor CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:

CHAPTER

FACTORY P/NCODICE DI FABBRICA

ANV P/NCODICE ANVCHAPTER

CAPITOLO FROM CSDA CS

FROM SUFFIXDA SUFFISSO

FROM ICSDA ICS

1 01 ––AA 01

2 03 ––AC 01

If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:

FACTORY CODE ANV CODE

P/N CS P/N ICS

487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01

487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01

you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ

If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:

FACTORY CODE ANV CODE

P/N CS P/N ICS

487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01

487.156.612 04 3AL 34422 AAAD 01

you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

252

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

Tab. 48. Hardware presetting documentation

The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook isthe highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents isnot specified in this table.

Id NAME AppANV P/N

(Factory P/N)

Documentfor hardwarepresettings

Equipment Controller SMEC 2A3AL 34649 AA––(487.156.720 C)

3AL 34649 AAAAMSZZQ

Microswitches ”ON” position3AL 37747 0001(962.000.022 F)

3AL 37747 0001MSZZQ

RRA Standard 155 3CY 00405 AA––(487.230.076 C)

3CY 00405 AAAAMSZZQ

POL DTMF repeater3CY 00935 AA––(483.200.046 M)

3CY 00935 AAAAMSZZQ

Party line DT3CY 00936 AA––(483.200.057 Q)

3CY 00936 AAAAMSZZQ

Driver Forcing HW 1553CY 01303 AA––(483.200.073 Q)

3CY 01303 AAAAMSZZQ

TPH DESK repeater/ DT3CY 02288 AA––(483.200.047 N)

3CY 02288 AAAAMSZZQ

RRAUX party line3CY 02516 AA––(483.200.079 W)

3CY 02516 AAAAMSZZQ

Terminal Station multirate dataservice (Nx2400)

3CY 02526 AA––(474.282.245 M)

3CY 02526 AAAAMSZZQ

Complete wiring board (extension)3CY 02756 AA––(487.239.011 Y)

3CY 02756 AAAAMSZZQ

AND OR/S3CY 03029 AA––(487.230.127 U)

3CY 03029 AAAAMSZZQ

Complete wiring board (main)3CY 04062 AA––(487.239.018 F )

3CY 04062 AAAAMSZZQ

SPL/R (HW)3CY 04276 AA––(487.230.171 G)

3CY 04276 AAAAMSZZQ

Services3CY 04279 AA––(483.200.094 E)

3CY 04279 AAAAMSZZQ

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

253

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

IdDocument

for hardwarepresettings

ANV P/N

(Factory P/N)AppNAME

Hitless switch 1+1/R3CY 04283 AA––(483.200.095 F)

3CY 04283 AAAAMSZZQ

Terminal station 8x1200 Baud dataservice

3CY 07400 AA––(411.200.149 Y)

3CY 07400 AAAAMSZZQ

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

254

04

955.203.182 A

/3CY 06669 AA AA

254

254

END OF DOCUMENT